Peugeot 308 2017 Owner's Manual – PDF Download
Handbook Peugeot 308
On-line handbook
Select one of the following means of access to view your handbook on-line...
Find your handbook on the Peugeot website, under "MyPeugeot".
This personal space offers advice and other useful information for the care and maintenance of your vehicle.
If the "MyPeugeot" function is not available on the Peugeot public website for your country, you can find your handbook at the following address: http://public.servicebox.peugeot.com/ddb/
Select: the language, the vehicle, its body style, the print edition of your handbook appropriate for the date of registration of your vehicle.
Scan this code for direct access to your handbook.
Referring to the handbook on-line also gives you access to the latest information available, easily identified by the bookmark, associated with this symbol:
Welcome
This handbook describes all of the equipment available in the whole range.
Your vehicle will be fitted with some of the equipment described in this document, depending on its trim level, version and the specification for the country in which it is sold.
The descriptions and illustrations are given without any obligation. Automobiles PEUGEOT reserves the right to modify the technical specifications, equipment and accessories without having to update this edition of the handbook.
This document is an integral part of your vehicle. It should be passed on to the new user in the event of sale or transfer.
Thank you for choosing a 308.
This handbook has been designed to enable you to make the most of your vehicle in all situations.
Key safety warning
additional information
contributes to the protection of the environment
Contents
. Overview . Eco-driving
Access
Remote control key
50
"Keyless Entry and Starting" with remote
control
56
"Keyless Entry and Starting"
58
Boot
61
Alarm
67
Electric windows
70
Lighting and visibility
Mirrors
105
Lighting control stalk
107
Daytime running lamps
110
Automatic illumination of headlamps
111
Direction indicators
112
Side spotlamps
113
Headlamp beam height adjustment
113
Wiper control stalk
114
Automatic rain sensitive wipers
116
Ease of use and comfort
PEUGEOT i-Cockpit
Steering wheel adjustment
Front seats
Instruments
Rear seats (hatchback) Rear seats (SW)
Instrument panel
12 Interior fittings
Indicator and warning lamps
13 Front armrest
Gauges and indicators
28 Boot fittings (hatchback)
Distance recorders
35 Boot fittings (SW)
Trip computer
37 Heating and Ventilation
Touch screen
40 Manual air conditioning
Setting the date and time
47 Manual air conditioning (Touch screen)
Dual-zone digital air conditioning (Touch screen)
Front demist - defrost
Rear screen demist - defrost
Panoramic sunroof
Courtesy lamps
Interior mood lighting
72
72
73
Safety
79 Hazard warning lamps
118
80 Emergency or assistance
119
82 Horn
121
84 Electronic stability control (ESC)
121
87 Seat belts
124
88 Airbags
127
91 Carrying children
131
93 Deactivating the passenger
front airbag
134
94 ISOFIX mountings and child seats
140
95 Child lock
144
100
101
102
103
104
Contents
Driving
Driving recommendations
146
Starting-switching off the engine
148
Manual parking brake
154
Electric parking brake
155
Hill start assist
162
5-speed manual gearbox
163
6-speed manual gearbox
163
Gear shift indicator
164
Automatic gearbox
165
Dynamic pack (Driver Sport Pack)
169
Stop & Start
170
Memorising speeds
173
Speed limiter
174
Cruise control
177
Dynamic cruise control
180
Display of inter-vehicle time
187
Emergency collision alert system,
emergency collision braking system
190
Blind spot monitoring system
195
Parking sensors
198
Reversing camera
200
Park Assist
201
Under-inflation detection
209
Practical information
Fuel tank
213
Diesel misfuel prevention
214
Snow chains
216
Very cold climate screen
217
Towing a trailer
218
Energy economy mode
219
Accessories
220
Changing a wiper blade
222
Fitting roof bars
223
Bonnet
225
Petrol engine
226
Diesel engine
227
Checking levels
228
Checks
231
AdBlue® and SCR system
(BlueHDi Diesel)
233
In the event of a breakdown
Warning triangle
(stowing)
238
Temporary puncture
repair kit
239
Spare wheel
246
Changing a bulb
252
Changing a fuse
262
12 V battery
268
Towing
272
Running out of fuel (Diesel)
274
Technical data
Petrol engines
275
Petrol weights
278
Diesel engines
281
Diesel weights
285
Dimensions
289
Identification markings
292
Audio equipment and telematics
DENON equipment
293
7-inch touch screen
295
Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5)
359
. Alphabetical index
Overview
Exterior
Keyless Entry and Starting
remote control
56-60, 63-65
Remote control key
50-55, 65
Starting
148-154
Wipers Changing a wiper blade
114-117 117, 222
Boot - opening / closing - emergency release
Temporary puncture repair kit
Warning triangle
61-62
239-245 238
Parking sensors Reversing camera Towbar Towing Park Assist
Changing bulbs - rear lamps - 3rd brake lamp - number plate lamps - foglamp
4
198-199 200
147, 218 272-273 201-208
257-261
Panoramic sunroof Bicycle carrier, roof bars Accessories
102 222-223 220-221
Fuel tank, misfuel prevention 213-215
Electric windows, deactivation 70-71
Door mirrors Blind spot sensors
105, 113 195-197
Lighting
107-113
Daytime running lamps (LEDs)
110
Headlamp beam adjustment
113
Changing bulbs
252-256
- front lamps - foglamps - direction indicator repeaters
Very cold climate screen
217
Heated windscreen and washer jets 117
Keyless Entry and Starting
Doors - opening / closing - central locking - emergency control
Alarm
56-60 50-52, 54
67-69
Electronic stability control
(ESC)
121-123
Snow chains
216
Tyre pressures
245, 251, 292
Inder-inflation detection
209-212
Spare wheel
246-251
- tools - removing / refitting
Emergency collision braking 190-194
Interior
Hatchback
Boot fittings Warning triangle (stowing) AdBlue tank
87 238 233-237
Rear seats
79
Rear armrest, ski flap
86
Child seats ISOFIX child seats Manual child lock
131-145 140-144
144
Front seats - manual adjustments - electric adjustments - head restraints - heated seats - electric lumbar adjustment - massage
PEUGEOT i-Cockpit
73-78 72
Seat belts
124-126
. Overview
Airbags Adjusting the steering wheel
127-130 72
Interior fittings - mats - front armrest - 12 V accessory socket -USB port / Auxiliary socket - 230 V socket
82-85
Deactivating the passenger's
front airbag
128, 134
5
Overview
SW
Boot fittings Luggage cover High load retaining net Warning triangle (stowing) AdBlue tank
88 89-90
90 238 233-237
Rear seats Rear armrest, ski flap
80-81 86
Child seats ISOFIX child seats Manual child lock
131-145 140-144
144
6
Front seats - manual adjustments - electric adjustments - head restraints - heated seats - electric lumbar adjustment - massage
PEUGEOT i-Cockpit
73-78 72
Seat belts
124-126
Airbags Adjusting the steering wheel
127-130 72
Interior fittings - mats - front armrest - 12 V accessory socket -USB port / Auxiliary socket - 230 V socket
82-85
Deactivating the passenger's front
airbag
128, 134
Instruments and controls
Courtesy lamps
103
Interior mood lighting, footwell
lighting
104
Rear view mirror
106
Peugeot Connect SOS, Peugeot Connect Assistance 119-120
Dashboard fuses
262-265
Opening the bonnet
225
5/6-speed manual gearbox Gear shift indicator Automatic gearbox Dynamic function Stop & Start Hill start assist
163 164 165-168 169 170-172 162
Manual parking brake Electric parking brake
154 155-161
. Overview
Touch screen
40-46, 295-357
Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5) 359-378
Setting the date and time
47-49
Manual air conditioning Manual air conditioning
(Touch screen) Dual-zone air conditioning
(Touch screen) Air intake / Air recirculation Front demist / defrost Rear screen demist / defrost
93
94-95
95-98 99
100 101
USB port / Auxiliary socket
85, 312, 366 / 367
7
Overview
Instruments and controls (cont.)
Instrument panel Warning lamps Indicators Gear shift indicator PEUGEOT i-Cockpit
12-13 13-27 28-35
164 72
Lighting Direction indicators
107-113 112
Headlamp beam adjustment
113
Stop & Start
170-172
Alarm
67-69
Heated windscreen and washer jets 117
8
Memorising speeds Speed limiter Cruise control Dynamic cruise control
173 174-176 177-179 180-186
Trip computer
37, 39
Trip computer (Touch screen) 38, 39
Setting the date/time (Touch screen) 47
Setting the date/time (screens C, A,
A without audio system)
48-49
Reversing camera
200
Display of inter-vehicle time 187-189
Collision risk alert
190-194
Emergency collision braking 193-194
Wipers Trip computer
114-117 37-39
Hazard warning lamps
118
Locking/unlocking from inside
66
Steering wheel adjustment
72
Horn
121
Maintenance - Technical data
Checking levels - oil
228-230
- brake fluid - coolant - screenwash, headlamp wash fluid
- additive (Diesel with particle filter)
Checking components - battery - air filter / passenger
231-232
compartment filter - oil filter - particle filter (Diesel)
- brake pads / discs
Changing bulbs - front - rear
252-261
Running out of fuel, Diesel
(priming pump)
274
Opening the bonnet Under the bonnet, petrol Under the bonnet, Diesel Petrol engines Diesel engines AdBlue
225 226 227 275-277 281-284 233-237
. Overview
12 V battery
268-271
Load reduction, economy mode
219
Engine compartment fuses
262, 266-267
Petrol weights Diesel weights
278-280 285-288
Dimensions Identification markings
289-291 292
9
Eco-driving
Eco-driving
Eco-driving is a range of everyday practices that allow the motorist to optimise their fuel consumption and CO2 emissions.
Optimise the use of your gearbox
With a manual gearbox, move off gently and change up without waiting. During acceleration change up early.
With an automatic or electronic gearbox, give preference to automatic mode and avoid pressing the accelerator pedal heavily or suddenly.
The gear shift indicator invites you to engage the most suitable gear: as soon as the indication is displayed in the instrument panel, follow it straight away. For vehicles fitted with an electronic or automatic gearbox, this indicator appears only in manual mode.
Drive smoothly
Maintain a safe distance between vehicles, use engine braking rather than the brake pedal, and press the accelerator progressively. These practices contribute towards a reduction in fuel consumption and CO2 emissions and also help to reduce the background traffic noise.
If your vehicle has cruise control, make use of the system at speeds above 25 mph (40 km/h) when the traffic is flowing well.
Control the use of your electrical equipment
Before moving off, if the passenger compartment is too warm, ventilate it by opening the windows and air vents before using the air conditioning. Above 30 mph (50 km/h), close the windows and leave the air vents open. Remember to make use of equipment that can help keep the temperature in the passenger compartment down (sunroof and window blinds...). Switch off the air conditioning, unless it has automatic regulation, as soon as the desired temperature is attained. Switch off the demisting and defrosting controls, if not automatic. Switch off the heated seat as soon as possible.
Switch off the headlamps and front foglamps when the level of light does not require their use.
Avoid running the engine before moving off, particularly in winter; your vehicle will warm up much faster while driving.
As a passenger, if you avoid connecting your multimedia devices (film, music, video game...), you will contribute towards limiting the consumption of electrical energy, and so of fuel. Disconnect your portable devices before leaving the vehicle.
10
Eco-driving
.
Limit the causes of excess consumption
Spread loads throughout the vehicle; place the heaviest items in the bottom of the boot, as close as possible to the rear seats. Limit the loads carried in the vehicle and reduce wind resistance (roof bars, roof rack, bicycle carrier, trailer...). Use a roof box in preference. Remove roof bars and roof racks after use.
At the end of winter, remove snow tyres and refit your summer tyres.
Observe the recommendations on maintenance
Check the tyre pressures regularly, when cold, referring to the label in the door aperture, driver's side. Carry out this check in particular: - before a long journey, - at each change of season, - after a long period out of use. Don't forget the spare wheel and the tyres on any trailer or caravan.
Have your vehicle serviced regularly (engine oil, oil filter, air filter, passenger compartment filter...) and observe the schedule of operations recommended in the manufacturer's service schedule.
With a BlueHDi Diesel engine, if the SCR system is faulty your vehicle becomes polluting; go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay to have the emissions of nitrogen oxides brought back to the legal level.
When refuelling, do not continue after the third cut-off of the nozzle to avoid any overflow.
At the wheel of your new vehicle, it is only after the first 1 800 miles (3 000 kilometres) that you will see the fuel consumption settle down to a consistent average.
11
Instruments
Instrument panel
Dials and screens
1. Fuel gauge. 2. Analogue speedometer (mph or km/h). 3.Engine oil level indicator. 4.Gear shift indicator. Gear with an automatic gearbox. 5. Digital speedometer (mph or km/h). 6. Cruise control or speed limiter settings.
7. Service indicator, then total distance recorder (miles or km).
These functions are displayed in turn when the ignition is switched on.
8.Trip distance recorder (miles or km). 9. Rev counter (x 1 000 rpm or tr/min),
graduation according to engine (petrol or Diesel). 10.Engine coolant temperature gauge.
Control buttons
A. Main lighting dimmer. B. Reset the trip distance recorder.
Instantaneous information on: - servicing, - remaining driving range with the
emissions additive.
12
Indicator and warning lamps
Visual indicators informing the driver that a system is in operation or is switched off (indicator lamp), or has a fault (warning lamp).
Instruments
1
When the ignition is switched on
Certain warning lamps come on for a few seconds in the instrument panel when the vehicle's ignition is switched on. When the engine is started, these same warning lamps should go off. If they remain on, before moving off, refer to the information on the warning lamp concerned.
Associated warnings
The switching on of certain warning lamps may be accompanied by an audible signal and a message. The warning lamps may come on continuously (fixed) or flash.
Certain warning lamps may come on in one of two modes: fixed (continuous) or flashing. Only by relating the type of illumination to the operation of the vehicle can it be determined whether the situation is normal or a fault has occurred. In the event of a fault, the illumination of the warning lamp may be accompanied by a message. Refer to the tables in the following pages for more information.
13
Instruments
Operation indicator lamps
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on in the instrument panel and/or instrument panel screen, this confirms that the corresponding system has come into operation.
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Left-hand
flashing with buzzer.
direction indicator
Right-hand
flashing with buzzer.
direction indicator
Sidelamps
fixed.
Dipped beam headlamps
Main beam headlamps
Front foglamps
fixed. fixed. fixed.
Cause
The lighting stalk has been pushed down.
Action/ Observations
The lighting stalk has been pushed up.
The lighting stalk is in the "Sidelamps" position.
The lighting stalk is in the "Dipped beam headlamps" position.
The lighting stalk has been pulled towards you.
The front foglamps are switched on.
Pull the stalk to return to dipped beam headlamps.
Turn the ring on the stalk rearwards twice to switch off the front foglamps.
For more information on the Lighting control stalk, refer to the corresponding section. 14
Warning/ indicator lamp State Rear foglamps fixed.
Diesel engine pre-heating
fixed.
Parking brake
fixed.
Cause The rear foglamps are on.
Action/ Observations
Instruments
1
Turn the ring on the stalk rearward to switch off the rear foglamps.
The ignition switch is at the 2nd position (ignition on) or the "START/STOP" button has been pressed.
The parking brake is applied or not fully released.
Wait until the warning lamp goes off before starting. Once it goes off, starting is immediate, on condition that: - the clutch pedal is pressed fully down with a
manual gearbox, - pressure is maintained on the brake pedal with an
automatic gearbox. The period of illumination of the warning lamp is determined by the ambient conditions (up to about thirty seconds in extreme conditions). If the engine does not start, switch the ignition off and then on, wait until the warning lamp goes off again, then start the engine.
To switch off the warning lamp: with your foot on the brake pedal, release the parking brake. If your vehicle has an electric parking brake: with your foot on the brake pedal, push the brake control lever. Observe the safety recommendations. For more information on the Manual parking brake and the Electric parking brake, refer to the corresponding section.
15
Instruments
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Automatic wiping
fixed.
Cause
The wiper control has been pushed down.
Action/ Observations
Automatic front wiping is activated. To deactivate automatic wiping, operate the control stalk downwards or put the stalk into another position.
Passenger's airbag system
fixed.
Stop & Start
fixed.
flashes for a few seconds, then goes off.
Blind spot monitoring system (depending on version)
fixed.
The control switch, located at the passenger's end of the dashboard, is at the "ON" position. The passenger's front airbag is activated. In this case, do not install a rearward facing child seat on the front passenger seat.
Turn the control switch to the "OFF" position to deactivate the passenger's front airbag. You can install a rearward facing child seat, unless there is a fault with the airbags (airbag warning lamp on).
When the vehicle stops (red lights, traffic The warning lamp goes off and the engine restarts
jams, ...) the Stop & Start system has put automatically in START mode, as soon as you want to
the engine into STOP mode.
move off.
STOP mode is temporarily unavailable, or START mode is invoked automatically.
For more information on Stop & Start, refer to the corresponding section.
The blind spot monitoring system has For more information on the Blind spot monitoring
been activated.
system, refer to the corresponding section.
16
Deactivation indicator lamps
If one of the following indicator lamps comes on, this confirms that the corresponding system has been switched off intentionally. This is may be accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message.
Instruments
1
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Cause
Action/ Observations
Passenger's front airbag
fixed in the seat belt and front passenger's airbag warning lamps display.
The control switch, located at the passenger's end of the dashboard, is set to the "OFF" position. The passenger's front airbag is deactivated. You can install a rearward facing child seat, unless there is a fault with the airbags (airbag warning lamp on).
Turn the control switch to the "ON" position to activate the passenger's front airbag; in this case, you must not install a child seat in the rearward facing position on this seat.
Dynamic stability control (DSC/ASR)
fixed.
The button is pressed and the indicator lamp comes on. The DSC/ASR is deactivated. DSC: dynamic stability control. ASR: anti-slip regulation.
Press the button to activate the DSC/ASR. Its indicator lamp goes off. The DSC/ASR system is activated automatically when the vehicle is started. If deactivated, the system is reactivated automatically from around 30 mph (50 km/h). For more information on the Electronic stability programme (ESC) and in particular, DSC/ASR, refer to the corresponding section.
17
Instruments
Warning lamps
When the engine is running or the vehicle is being driven, illumination of one of the following warning lamps indicates a fault which requires action on the part of the driver. Any fault resulting in the illumination of a warning lamp must be investigated further using the associated message. If you encounter any problems, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Cause
STOP
fixed, associated with another warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.
Illumination of this warning lamp is related to a serious fault detected with the engine, the braking system, the power steering, etc., or a major electrical fault.
Action/ Observations
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Park, switch off the ignition and call a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
18
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Service
on temporarily.
Cause
A minor fault has occurred for which there is no specific warning lamp.
Action/ Observations
Instruments
1
Identify the cause of fault by means of the message displayed in the screen. You can deal with some faults or anomalies yourself, such as an open door, or the start of saturation of the particle filter (as soon as the traffic conditions permit, regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at least 37 mph (60 km/h), until the warning lamp goes off). For other faults, such as a failure of the under-inflation detection system, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed.
A major fault has occurred for which there is no specific warning lamp.
Identify the fault by reading the message displayed; you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
+
fixed, associated with The servicing interval has been
Only on BlueHDi Diesel versions.
flashing and then fixed exceeded.
Your vehicle must be serviced as soon as possible.
display of the service
spanner.
19
Instruments
Warning/ indicator lamp State Electric parking flashing. brake
Electric parking fixed. brake fault
Deactivation of the automatic functions of the electric parking brake
fixed.
Cause
The electric parking brake is not applied automatically. The application/release is faulty.
Action/ Observations
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Park on flat level ground, engage a gear (or place the lever in position P for an automatic gearbox), switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
The electric parking brake has a fault.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay. For more information on the Electric parking brake, refer to the corresponding section.
The "automatic application" (on switching off the engine) and "automatic release" functions are deactivated or faulty. In the event of a fault, illumination of this warning lamp is accompanied by a warning message.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop if automatic application / release is no longer possible. The parking brake can be released manually. For more information on the Electric parking brake and in particular the reactivation of the automatic functions, refer to the corresponding section.
20
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Braking
fixed.
Cause
The brake fluid level has dropped significantly.
Action/ Observations
Instruments
1
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Top-up with brake fluid listed by PEUGEOT. If the problem persists, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
+
fixed, associated
The electronic brake force distribution You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so.
with the ABS warning (EBFD) system has a fault.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified
lamp.
workshop.
Anti-lock Braking System (ABS)
fixed.
Dynamic stability control (DSC/ASR)
flashing.
fixed.
The anti-lock braking system has a fault.
The DSC/ASR regulation is operating.
The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive carefully at reduced speed and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
The system optimises traction and improves the directional stability of the vehicle in the event of loss of grip or trajectory.
The DSC/ASR system has a fault.
Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
21
Instruments
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Engine autodiagnosis system
flashing.
Cause
Action/ Observations
The engine management system has a fault.
Risk of destruction of the catalytic converter. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed.
The emission control system has a fault.
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started. If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified workshop without delay.
Emergency Collision Braking System
flashing.
The Emergency Collision Braking System is active.
The system brakes briefly so as to reduce the speed of collision with the vehicle ahead.
fixed, accompanied by a mesage and an audible signal
The Emergency Collision Braking System has a fault.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
fixed.
The Emergency Collision Braking System has been deactivated (via the menu).
Low fuel level
fixed, with the needle in the red zone.
When it first comes on, there remains less than 6 litres of fuel in the tank.
You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out of fuel. This warning lamp will come on every time the ignition is switched on, until a sufficient addition of fuel is made. Fuel tank capacity: approximately 53 litres or 45 litres (depending on version). Never continue to drive until you run out of fuel, as this could damage the emission control and injection systems.
22
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Seat belt not fastened / unfastened
fixed or flashing accompanied by an audible signal.
Airbags
on temporarily.
fixed.
Cause
A seat belt has not been fastened or has been unfastened.
Instruments
Action/ Observations Pull the strap then insert the tongue in the buckle.
1
This lamp comes on for a few seconds when you turn on the ignition, then goes off.
One of the airbag or seat belt pretensioner systems has a fault.
This lamp should go off when the engine is started. If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Battery charge* fixed.
The battery charging circuit has a fault (dirty or loose terminals, slack or cut alternator belt, ...).
The warning lamp should go off when the engine is started. If it does not go off, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
* Depending on the country of sale. 23
Instruments
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Engine oil pressure
fixed.
Cause
There is a fault with the engine lubrication system.
Action/ Observations
You must stop as soon it is safe to do so. Park, switch off the ignition and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Under-inflation
fixed, accompanied by The pressure in one or more tyres is an audible signal and too low. a message.
Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible. This check should preferably be carried out when the tyres are cold. You must reinitialise the system after the adjustment of one or more tyre pressures and after changing one or more wheels. For more information on Under-inflation detection, refer to the corresponding section.
+
flashing then fixed,
The system has a fault: the tyre
Check the tyre pressures as soon as possible.
accompanied by the pressures are no longer monitored. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a
Service warning lamp.
qualified workshop.
24
Warning/ indicator lamp State
Foot on the brake pedal
fixed.
Foot on the clutch
fixed.
Cause The brake pedal must be pressed.
Action/ Observations
Instruments
1
With an automatic gearbox, press the brake pedal, engine running, before releasing the parking brake, to unlock the lever and come out of position P. If you wish to release the parking brake without pressing the brake pedal, this warning lamp will remain on.
In the STOP mode of Stop & Start, the change to START mode is denied because the clutch pedal is not fully down.
If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, you must declutch fully to allow the change to engine START mode.
Warning or indicator lamp State in the instrument panel
Cause
Door(s) open
fixed, associated with a message identifying the door, if the speed is below 6 mph (10 km/h).
A door or the boot is still open.
fixed, associated with a message identifying the door, together with an audible signal if the speed is above 6 mph (10 km/h).
Action / Observations Close the door or boot.
25
Instruments
Warning or indicator lamp
in the instrument panel
State
Cause
AdBlue® (BlueHDi Diesel)
fixed, on switching on the ignition, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range.
The remaining driving range is between 350 miles (600 km) and 1500 miles (2400 km).
+
flashing, associated with The remaining driving range is
the SERVICE warning between 0 and 350 miles (600 km).
lamp, accompanied by
an audible signal and a
message indicating the
remaining driving range.
Action/ Observations Top-up the AdBlue® as soon as possible or go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
You must top-up the AdBlue® to avoid a breakdown or go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
flashing, associated with the SERVICE warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating that starting is prevented.
The AdBlue® tank is empty: the starting inhibition system required by legislation prevents starting of the engine.
To be able to start the engine, you must top-up the AdBlue® or call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. It is essential to add at least 3.8 litres of AdBlue® to the fluid tank
For topping-up or for more information on AdBlue® and the SCR system, refer to the corresponding section.
26
Warning or indicator lamp
in the instrument panel
State
Cause
SCR emissions fixed, on switching on
A fault with the SCR emissions
control system the ignition, associated
control system has been detected.
+ (BlueHDi Diesel) with the SERVICE and
engine diagnostic warning
lamps, accompanied by
+
an audible signal and a
message.
Action/ Observations
Instruments
1
This alert disappears once the exhaust emissions return to normal levels.
flashing, on switching on the ignition, associated with the SERVICE and engine diagnostic warning lamps, accompanied by an audible signal and a message indicating the remaining driving range.
After confirmation of the fault with the emissions control system, you can drive for up to 650 miles (1 100 km) before the engine starting inhibition system is triggered.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay, to avoid a breakdown.
flashing, on switching on the ignition, associated with the SERVICE and engine diagnostic warning lamps, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.
You have exceeded the authorised driving limit following confirmation of a fault with the emissions control system: the engine starting inhibition system prevents starting of the engine.
To be able to start the engine, you must call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
27
Instruments
Gauges and indicators
Coolant temperature gauge
With the engine running, when the needle is: - in zone A, the temperature is correct, - in zone B, the temperature is too high;
the maximum temperature and the central STOP warning lamps come on, accompanied by an audible signal and a warning message in the screen. You MUST stop as soon as it is safe to do so. Wait a few minutes before switching off the engine. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
After driving for a few minutes, the temperature and pressure in the cooling system increase. To top-up the level: F wait for the engine to cool, F unscrew the cap slightly to allow the
pressure to drop, F when the pressure has dropped, remove
the cap, F top-up the level to the "MAX" mark.
Be aware of the risk of burns when topping up the cooling system. Do not fill above the maximum level (indicated on the header tank).
Service indicator
System which informs the driver when the next service is due, in accordance with the manufacturer's servicing schedule. The point at which the next service is due is calculated from the last indicator zero reset, depending on the distance travelled and the time elapsed since the last service. For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the degree of deterioration of the engine oil is also taken into account (depending on the country of sale).
More than 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due
When the ignition is switched on, no service information appears in the screen.
28
Instruments
1
Between 600 miles (1 000 km) and 1 800 miles (3 000 km) remain before the next service is due
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner symbolising the service operations comes on. The distance recorder display line indicates the distance remaining before the next service is due. Example: 1 700 miles (2 800 km) remain before the next service is due. For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the screen indicates:
Less than 600 miles (1 000 km) remain before the next service is due
Example: 560 miles (900 km) remain before the next service is due. For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the screen indicates:
Service overdue
For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner flashes to indicate that the service must be carried out as soon as possible. Example: the service is overdue by 180 miles (300 km). For 5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the screen indicates:
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the spanner goes off; the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The screen then indicates the total distance.
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The spanner remains on to indicate that a service must be carried out soon.
5 seconds after the ignition is switched on, the distance recorder resumes its normal operation. The spanner remains on.
For BlueHDi Diesel versions, this alert may also be accompanied by the fixed illumination of the service warning lamp when the ignition is on.
29
Instruments
The distance remaining may be weighted by the time factor, depending on the driving conditions. Therefore, the spanner may also come on if you have exceeded the period since the last service, indicated in the manufacturer's service schedule. For BlueHDi Diesel versions, the spanner may also be brought on earlier than expected, depending on the degree of deterioration of the engine oil (depending on the country of sale). The rate of deterioration of the engine oil depends on the driving conditions in which the vehicle is used.
Resetting the service indicator
Retrieving the service information
You can access the service information at any time. F Press the trip distance recorder reset
button. The service information is displayed for a
few seconds, then disappears.
After each service, the service indicator must be reset to zero. If you have carried out the service on your vehicle yourself: F switch off the ignition, F press and hold the trip distance recorder
reset button, F switch on the ignition; the distance recorder
display begins a countdown, F when the display indicates "=0", release
the button; the spanner disappears.
If you have to disconnect the battery following this operation, lock the vehicle and wait at least 5 minutes for the reset to be registered.
30
Engine oil level indicator
On versions fitted with an electric oil gauge, information on the conformity of the oil level is displayed in the instrument panel for a few seconds when the ignition is switched on, at the same time as the service information.
The level read will only be correct if the vehicle is on level ground and the engine has been off for more than 30 minutes.
Oil level correct
Instruments
1
Oil level incorrect
This is indicated by a message in the instrument panel. If the low oil level is confirmed by a check using the dipstick, the level must be topped-up to avoid damage to the engine.
Oil level indicator fault
Dipstick
To locate the dipstick and the oil filler cap on a Petrol engine or a Diesel engine, refer to the corresponding section.
There are 2 marks on the dipstick: - A = max; never exceed this
level, - B = min; top-up the level via
the oil filler, using the grade of oil suited to your engine.
This is indicated by a message in the instrument panel.
This is indicated by a message in the instrument panel. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
31
Instruments
AdBlue® fluid range indicators
Once the AdBlue® tank is on reserve or after detection of a fault with the SCR emissions control system, when the ignition is switched on an indicator displays an estimate of the distance that can be covered, the range, before engine starting is prevented. In the event of simultaneous system fault and low AdBlue® level, the shortest range figure is the one displayed.
In the event of the risk of non-starting related to a lack of AdBlue®
Remaining range greater than 1 500 miles (2 400 km)
When switching on the ignition, there is no automatic display of range in the instrument panel.
Remaining range between 350 and 1500 miles (600 and 2 400 km)
Pressing this button will display the remaining range.
You can access this information in the touch screen, if your vehicle has one.
F Select the "Driving assistance" menu.
FThen "Diagnostic".
When switching on the ignition, the UREA warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message (e.g. "Top-up emissions additive: Starting prevented in 900 miles") indicating the remaining range expressed in miles or kilometres. When driving, the message is displayed every 200 miles (300 km) until the AdBlue® fluid has been topped-up. Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the AdBlue® topped-up. You can also top-up the tank yourself.
The engine start prevention system required by regulations is activated automatically once the AdBlue® tank is empty.
The range at that moment is then displayed.
Above 3 000 miles (5 000 km), the value is not specified.
For more information on AdBlue® and the SCR system, and topping-up in particular, refer to the corresponding section.
32
Remaining range between 0 and 350 miles (0 and 600 km) Breakdown related to a lack of AdBlue® additive
When switching on the ignition, the SERVICE warning lamp comes on and the UREA warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message (e.g. "Top-up emissions additive: Starting prevented in 350 miles") indicating the remaining range expressed in miles or kilometres. When driving, the message is displayed every 30 seconds until the AdBlue® fluid has been topped-up. Go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the AdBlue® topped-up. You can also top-up the tank yourself. Otherwise you will not be able to restart your engine.
When switching on the ignition, the SERVICE warning lamp comes on and the UREA warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of the message "Top-up emissions additive: Starting prevented". The AdBlue® tank is empty: the system required by regulations prevents engine starting.
To be able to start the engine, we recommend that you call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for the top-up required. If you carry out the top-up yourself, it is essential to add at least 3.8 litres of AdBlue® to the tank.
For more information on AdBlue® and the SCR system, and topping-up in particular, refer to the corresponding section.
Instruments
1
33
Instruments
In the event of a fault with the SCR emissions control system
A system that prevents engine starting is activated automatically from 650 miles (1 100 km) after confirmation of a fault with the SCR emissions control system. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
In the event of the detection of a fault
During an authorised driving phase (between 650 miles and 0 miles) (1 100 km and 0 km)
Starting prevented
The UREA, SERVICE and diagnostic warning lamps comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of the message "Emissions fault". The alert is triggered when driving when the fault is detected for the first time, then when switching on the ignition for subsequent journeys, while the fault persists.
If it is a temporary fault, the alert disappears during the next journey, after self-diagnosis of the SCR system.
If a fault with the SCR system is confirmed (after 30 miles (50 km) covered with the permanent display of the message signalling a fault), the SERVICE and engine diagnostic warning lamps come on and the UREA warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of a message (e.g.: "Emissions fault: Starting prevented in 150 miles") indicating the remaining range express in miles or kilometres. While driving, the message is displayed every 30 seconds while the fault with the SCR system persists. The alert is repeated when switching on the ignition. You should go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible. Otherwise, you will not be able to restart your engine.
Every time the ignition is switched on, the SERVICE and engine diagnostic warning lamps come on and the UREA warning lamp flashes, accompanied by an audible signal and the display of the message "Emissions fault: Starting prevented".
You have exceeded the authorised driving limit: the starting prevention system inhibits engine starting.
To be able to start the engine, you must call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
34
Distance recorders
The total and trip distances are displayed for thirty seconds when the ignition is switched off, when the driver's door is opened and when the vehicle is locked or unlocked.
Total distance recorder
Instruments
1
Trip distance recorder
When travelling abroad, you may have to change the units of distance: the display of road speed must be in the official units (miles or km) for the country. The change of units is done via the screen configuration menu, with the vehicle stationary.
It measures the total distance travelled by the vehicle since its first registration.
It measures the distance travelled since it was reset to zero by the driver. F With the ignition on, press the button until
zeros appear.
35
Instruments
Lighting dimmer control
For the manual adjustment of the brightness of the instrument panel and the touch screen.
Operates only when the vehicle's exterior lighting is on.
Touch screen
Instrument panel
F Press on the "Configuration" menu. F Adjust the brightness (only on the touch
screen) by pressing on the "+" or "-" buttons.
With the exterior lighting on, press this button to adjust the brightness of the dashboard lighting, the touch screen and the mood lighting. As soon as the lighting reaches the required level of brightness, release the button.
36
Trip computer
System that gives you information on the current journey (range, fuel consumption...).
Depending on version
Instrument panel screen
-The current information tab with: the range, the current fuel consumption, the Stop & Start time counter.
Trip reset
Instruments
1
Information display
F Press the button on the end of the wiper control stalk to display the various tabs in succession.
-Trip "1" with: the average speed, the average fuel consumption, the distance travelled, for the first trip.
-Trip "2" with: the average speed, the average fuel consumption, the distance travelled, for the second trip.
F When the trip required is displayed, press the control for more than two seconds or use the left-hand thumbwheel of the steering mounted controls.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use is identical. For example, trip "1" can be used for daily figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.
37
Instruments
Trip computer
Touch screen
System that gives you information on the current journey (range, fuel consumption...). The information is accessible in the "Driving assistance" menu.
Information display in the touch screen
The current fuel consumption tab with: - the range, - the current fuel consumption, - the Stop & Start time counter.
Trip reset
Permanent display: F Select the "Driving assistance" menu. The trip computer information is displayed in the primary page of the menu. F Press one of the buttons to display the
desired tab.
Temporary display in a new window: F Press the end of the wiper control stalk for
access to the information and display the different tabs.
The trip "1" tab with: - the distance travelled, - the average fuel consumption, - the average speed,
for the first trip.
The trip "2" tab with: - the distance travelled, - the average fuel consumption, - the average speed,
for the second trip.
F When the desired trip is displayed, press the reset button or on the end of the wiper control stalk.
Trips "1" and "2" are independent but their use is identical. For example, trip "1" can be used for daily figures, and trip "2" for monthly figures.
38
Trip computer, a few definitions
Range
(miles or km) The distance which can still be travelled with the fuel remaining in the tank (related to the average fuel consumption over the last few miles (kilometres) travelled).
This value may vary following a change in the style of driving or the relief, resulting in a significant change in the current fuel consumption.
When the range falls below 20 miles (30 km), dashes are displayed. After filling with at least 5 litres of fuel, the range is recalculated and is displayed when it exceeds 60 miles (100 km).
If dashes are displayed continuously while driving in place of the digits, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Current fuel consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l) Calculated over the last few seconds.
This function is only displayed from 20mph (30 km/h).
Average fuel consumption
(mpg or l/100 km or km/l) Calculated since the last trip computer reset.
Average speed
(mph or km/h) Calculated since the last trip computer reset.
Instruments
1
Distance travelled
(miles or km) Calculated since the last trip computer reset.
Stop & Start time counter
(minutes / seconds or hours / minutes)
A time counter calculates the time spent in STOP mode during a journey. It resets to zero every time the ignition is switched on.
39
Instruments
Touch screen
It gives access to: - the heating/air conditioning controls, - menus for adjusting settings for vehicle
functions and systems, - audio and display configuration menus, - audio system and telephone controls and
the display of associated information.
And, depending on equipment, it allows: - the display of alert messages and the
visual parking sensors information, - access to the controls for the navigation
system and Internet services, and the display of associated information.
General operation
Recommendations
It is necessary to press firmly, particularly for "flick" gestures (scrolling through lists, moving the map...). A light wipe is not enough. The screen does not recognise pressing with more than one finger. This technology allows use at all temperatures and when wearing gloves. Do not use pointed objects on the touch screen. Do not touch the touch screen with wet hands. Uses a soft clean cloth to clean the touch screen.
State of indicator lamps
Some buttons contain an indicator lamp that gives the state of the corresponding function. Green indicator: you have switched on the corresponding function. Orange indicator: you have switched off the corresponding function.
For reasons of safety, the driver should only carry out operations that require close attention, with the vehicle stationary. Some functions are not accessible when driving.
40
Principles
Use the buttons on either side of the touch screen for access to the menus, then press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. Each menu is displayed over one or two pages (primary page and secondary page).
Touch screen menus
Instruments
1
Use this button to go to the secondary page.
Use this button to return to the primary page.
After a few moments with no action on the secondary page, the primary page is displayed automatically.
Use this button for access to additional information and to the settings for certain functions.
Use this button to confirm.
Use this button to quit.
Air conditioning. Allows adjustment of the various settings for temperature, air flow... See the sections on "Heating", "Manual air conditioning" and "Digital air conditioning".
Driving assistance. Allows certain functions to be switched on and off and their settings adjusted.
Media. See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.
Configuration. Allows configuration of the display and the system.
Connected services. These services can be not available, an option or standard. See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.
Telephone. See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.
Navigation. Depending on trim level, navigation can be not available, an option or standard. See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.
1. Volume/ mute. See the "Audio equipment and telematics" section.
41
Instruments
"Driving assistance" menu
The systems with settings that can be adjusted are detailed in the table below.
Button
Corresponding function Speed settings
Comments Memorisation of speeds for use with the speed limiter or cruise control.
Under-inflation initialisation Reinitialisation of the under-inflation system.
Blind spot sensors
Activation of the function.
Park Assist
Activation/Deactivation of the function
42
Button
Corresponding function Vehicle settings
Diagnostic Parking sensors Dynamic cruise control
Instruments
Comments
Access to other functions with settings that can be adjusted. Select or deselect the tabs at the bottom of the screen to display the functions required. - "Driving assistance"
- "[Automatic rear wiper in reverse]" (activation of rear wiper coupled to reverse gear). For more information on the Wiper control stalk, refer to the corresponding section.
- "[Collision risk alert]" (activation of the collision risk alert system). For more information on Collision risk alert and emergency automatic braking, refer to the corresponding section. - "Lighting"
- "[Guide-me-home lighting]" (automatic guide-me-home lighting), - "[Welcome lighting]" (exterior welcome lighting). For more information on the Lighting control stalk, refer to the corresponding section. - "[Mood lighting]" (interior mood lighting). For more information on Mood lighting, refer to the corresponding section. - "Vehicle access" - "[Driver plip action]" (selective unlocking of the driver's door). For more information on the Remote control or Keyless Entry and Starting, refer to the corresponding section. - "[Unlocking boot]" (selective unlocking of the boot). For more information on the Boot, refer to the corresponding section.
1
List of current alerts.
Activation/Deactivation of the function.
Choice of the standard cruise control or the dynamic cruise control. The choice of dynamic cruise control is retained on condition that the steering mounted control thumbwheel is at the "CRUISE" position.
43
Instruments
State of adjustable systems
Some systems have a dedicated button, to which is associated an indicator lamp. Illumination of this lamp indicates whether the system is activated or deactivated compared to the default (factory) setting. Green indicator: you have switched on the corresponding system. Orange indicator: you have switched off the corresponding system.
Example: Function not activated.
Operating fault alert. then
Operating fault In the event of a fault with one of these systems, the indicator lamp in the activation/ deactivation button flashes for a few moments. An alert symbol is displayed to the right of the button symbol, then, in the case of systems that are activated by default, the orange indicator comes on permanently. Every time the button is pressed, the indicator flashes for a few moments.
44
"Configuration" menu
The functions available through this menu are detailed in the table below.
Button
Corresponding function Audio settings
Comments Adjustment of volume, balance...
Colour schemes
Choice of colour scheme.
Interactive help
Access to the interactive user guide.
Turn off screen
Brightness
Instruments
1
45
Instruments
Button
Corresponding function System Settings
Time/Date
Languages
Screen settings
Calculator
Calendar
Comments Choice of units: - temperature (°Celsius or °Fahrenheit) - distance and fuel consumption (l/100 km, mpg or km/l). Setting the date and time.
Choice of language used: French, English, Italian, Spanish, German, Dutch, Portuguese, Polish, Turkish, Russian, Serbian, Croat, Hungarian, Czech, Brazilian.
Adjustment of the display settings (scrolling of text, animations...)
46
Setting the date and time
Touch screen
Instruments
1
This function is accessible in the touch screen.
F Select the "Configuration" menu.
F In the secondary page, press on "Time/ Date".
F Select "Adjust time" or "Adjust date" and modify the settings using the numeric keypad, then confirm.
F Press "Confirm" to quit.
47
Instruments
Screen C
F Press the "7" or "8" button to select the Personalisation-configuration menu, then confirm by pressing the "OK" button.
F Press the "5" or "6" button to select the Display configuration menu then confirm by pressing the "OK" button.
F Press the "5" or "6" and "7" or "8" buttons to set the date and time, then confirm by pressing the "OK" button.
F Press the MENU button for access to the main menu.
For more information on the Multimedia menu, refer to the "Audio and telematics" section.
48
Screen A
You have access to the following settings: - year, - month, - day, - hour, - minutes, - 12 or 24 hour mode.
Instruments
1
Screen A (without audio system)
F Press the "MENU" button to gain access to the main menu, then press the "5" or "6" buttons to go to the Display settings menu.
F Press the "OK" button to select the menu required.
F Once you have selected a setting, press the "7" or "8" buttons to change its value.
F Once you have selected a setting using the "5" or "6" buttons, press the "OK" button to change its value.
F Wait for approximately ten seconds without any action to allow the change to be registered or press the "ESC" button to cancel.
The screen then returns to the normal display.
F Press the "5" or "6" buttons to switch respectively to the previous or next setting.
F Press the "OK" button to register the change and return to the normal display or press the "]" button to cancel.
49
Access
Remote control key
System for the central locking or unlocking of the vehicle using the door lock or from a distance. It is also used to open and close the fuel filler cap, locate and start the vehicle, as well as providing protection against theft.
Complete unlocking
Using the key
Using the remote control
F Press this button to unlock the vehicle.
Unfolding / Folding the key
F Press this button to unfold or fold the key.
FTurn the key to the front of the vehicle to unlock the vehicle, then pull the handle to open the door.
If your vehicle has an alarm, this is not deactivated. Opening a door will trigger the alarm, which can then be stopped by switching the ignition on.
Unlocking is confirmed by rapid flashing of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds. According to version, the door mirrors unfold at the same time.
If you do not press the button, you risk damaging the remote control.
50
Access
Selective unlocking
Complete unlocking is activated by default. This is set in the "Driving assistance" menu, then "Vehicle settings" and "Vehicle access".
Normal locking
Using the key
Use this button for access to additional information.
Using the remote control
FTo unlock the driver's door only, press this button once.
FTo unlock the other doors and the boot, press this button again
Unlocking is confirmed by rapid flashing of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds. According to version, the door mirrors unfold at the same time as the first unlocking action.
FTurn the key towards the rear of the vehicle to fully lock the vehicle.
If your vehicle has an alarm, this will not be activated.
Using the remote control
F Press this button to fully lock the vehicle.
Maintaining the locking action (key or remote control) automatically closes the windows.
Locking is confirmed by fixed lighting of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds. According to version, the door mirrors fold at the same time.
2
Driving with the doors locked may render access for the emergency services difficult in an emergency. As a safety measure (children on board), never leave the vehicle without taking your key, even for a short period.
When a door or the boot is not fully closed, engine running or vehicle moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), a message appears for a few seconds.
51
Access
If one of the doors or the boot is still open, the central locking does not take place. When the vehicle is locked, if it is unlocked inadvertently, it will lock itself again automatically after about thirty seconds unless a door is opened.
Deadlocking
Deadlocking renders the exterior and interior door controls inoperative. It also deactivates the manual central control button. Therefore, never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
Using the remote control
F Press this button to fully lock the vehicle.
F Press this button again within five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
And if your vehicle has an alarm, this will not be reactivated. The folding and unfolding of the door mirrors by the remote control can be deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Using the key
Deadlocking is confirmed by fixed lighting of the direction indicators for approximately two seconds. Depending on version, the door mirrors fold at the same time.
FTurn the key to the rear in the driver's door lock to lock the vehicle completely.
FTurn the key to the rear again within five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
52
Locating your vehicle
This function allows you to identify your vehicle from a distance, particularly in poor light. Your vehicle must be locked.
F Press this button.
This will switch on the courtesy lamps and the direction indicators will flash for around ten seconds.
Anti-theft protection
Electronic engine immobiliser
The key contains an electronic chip which has a special code. When the ignition is switched on, this code must be recognised in order for starting to be possible. This electronic engine immobiliser locks the engine management system a few moments after the ignition is switched off and prevents starting of the engine by anyone who does not have the key.
Remote operation of lighting
A short press this button switches on the lighting remotely (sidelamps, dipped beam headlamps and number plate lamps).
A second press before the end of the timed period cancels the remote lighting.
In the event of a fault, you are informed by illumination of this warning lamp, an audible signal and a message in the screen. In this case, your vehicle will not start; contact a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible.
Keep safely, away from your vehicle, the label attached to the keys given to you on acquisition of the vehicle.
Access
2
53
Access
Back-up control
For mechanically locking and unlocking the doors in the event of a fault with the central locking system or a battery failure.
Driver's door
Passenger doors
Remote control problem
Following disconnection of the vehicle battery, replacement of the remote control battery or in the event of a remote control malfunction, you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your vehicle. F First of all, use the key in the lock to unlock
or lock your vehicle. FThen, reinitialise the remote control. If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT dealer as soon as possible.
F Insert the key in the lock to lock or unlock the door.
If your vehicle has an alarm, it will not be activated and deactivated on locking and unlocking the vehicle. Opening a door will trigger the alarm, which can be stopped by switching on the ignition.
F On the rear doors, check that the child lock is not on.
F Insert the integral key into the latch on the edge of the door and turn it an eighth of a turn to the right, for the right-hand side and to the left for the left-hand side.
F Close the doors and check from the outside that they have locked correctly.
54
Reinitialisation
Changing the battery
Access
2
F Switch off the ignition. FTurn the key to position 2 (Ignition).
F Press the closed padlock immediately for a few seconds.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key from the ignition switch.
The remote control is fully operational again.
Battery ref.: CR1620 / 3 volts. If the battery is flat, you are informed by lighting of this warning lamp in the instrument panel, an audible signal and a message in the screen.
FUnclip the cover using a screwdriver in the cut-out.
F Remove the cover. F Remove the flat battery from its housing. F Place the new battery into its housing,
observing the polarity. F Clip the cover in place.
Do not throw the remote control batteries away, they contain metals which are harmful to the environment. Take them to an approved collection point.
55
Access
"Keyless Entry and Starting" with remote control
System for the central locking or unlocking of the vehicle using the door lock or from a distance. It is also used to locate and start the vehicle, as well as providing protection against theft.
Complete unlocking
Selective unlocking
Locking
Complete unlocking is activated by default.
This setting is done in the "Driving assistance" menu, then "Vehicle settings" and "Vehicle access".
F Press this button to fully lock the vehicle. Hold the button down until the windows close completely.
F Press this button to unlock the vehicle.
Use this button for access to additional information.
FTo unlock only the driver's door, press this button once.
FTo unlock the other doors and the boot, press this button again.
Locking is confirmed by fixed illumination of the direction indicators for a few seconds. Depending on version, the door mirrors fold and the alarm is activated.
Unlocking is confirmed by rapid flashing of the direction indicators for two seconds. At the same time, depending on version, the door mirrors unfold. And if your vehicle has an alarm, it is deactivated
Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services difficult in the event of an emergency. Be aware of children when operating the windows.
If a door or the boot is not properly closed, with the engine running or the vehicle moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), a message appears for a few seconds.
56
Locating your vehicle
This function allows you to identify your vehicle from a distance, particularly in poor light. Your vehicle must be locked.
F Press this button.
This will switch on the courtesy lamps and the direction indicators will flash for around ten seconds.
As a safety measure (children on board), never leave the vehicle without taking the key for the Keyless Entry and Starting system, even for a short period. Guard against theft when the key for the Keyless Entry and Starting system is in the recognition zone with the vehicle unlocked. In order to preserve the charge of the cell battery in the remote control, the "hands-free" functions go into extended stand-by after 21 days of non-use. To restore these functions, press one of the remote control buttons or start the engine with the electronic key in the reader.
Access
2
57
Access
"Keyless Entry and Starting"
System for unlocking, locking and starting the vehicle while keeping the electronic key on your person.
Complete unlocking
The central locking does not take place: - if the ignition is on, - if one of the doors or the boot is still
open, - if the key for the Keyless Entry and
Starting system has been left inside the vehicle. When the vehicle is locked, if it is unlocked inadvertently, it will lock itself again automatically after about thirty seconds unless a door is opened. And if your vehicle has an alarm, this is not reactivated. The folding and unfolding of the door mirrors by the remote control can be deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
F With the electronic key on your person and in the recognition zone A, pass your hand behind one of the front door handles to unlock the vehicle, then pull on the handle to open the door.
Selective unlocking
When selective unlocking of the driver's door is activated: F With the electronic key in the driver's door
zone, pass your hand behind the driver's door handle to unlock just the driver's door, then pull on the door handle to open the door. F With the electronic key in the passenger's door zone, pass your hand behind the passenger's door handle to unlock the whole vehicle, then pull on the door handle to open the door.
By default, complete unlocking is activated. This setting is done in the "Driving assistance" menu, then "Vehicle settings" and "Vehicle access".
Use this button for access to additional information.
Unlocking is confirmed by rapid flashing of the direction indicators for a few seconds. Depending on version, the door mirrors unfold and the alarm is deactivated.
58
Locking
Access
For reasons of safety and theft protection, do not leave your electronic key in the vehicle, even when you are close to it.
It is recommended that you keep it on your person.
2
F With the electronic key in the recognition zone A, press with a finger on one of the front door handles (at the markings) or press the locking control on the tailgate to lock the vehicle. Maintain pressure with your finger until the windows close completely.
If a door or the boot is not properly closed, with the engine running or the vehicle moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), a message appears for a few seconds.
Locking is confirmed by fixed illumination of the direction indicators for a few seconds. Depending on version, the door mirrors fold and the alarm is activated.
Ensure that nobody prevents the correct operation of the windows. Be aware of children when operating the windows.
59
Access
Deadlocking
Deadlocking renders the exterior and interior door controls inoperative. It also deactivates the manual central locking button. You must therefore never leave anyone inside the vehicle when it is deadlocked.
With Keyless Entry and Starting
Using the remote control
F Press this button to lock the vehicle completely.
Maintain pressure with your finger to close the windows.
F Press this button again within five seconds to deadlock the vehicle.
By the doors or tailgate: F With the electronic key on your person
in the recognition zone A, press with a finger or thumb on the door handle (at the markings) or on the locking control on the tailgate (right-hand side) to lock the vehicle.
F Within five seconds, press the door handle or the locking control on the tailgate (righthand side) again to deadlock the vehicle.
Ensure that nothing or any person prevents the correct closing of the windows. Be particularly aware of children when operating the windows.
60
Accumulations (water, dust, grime, salt...) on the inner surface of the door handle may affect detection. If cleaning the inner surface of the door handle using a cloth does not restore detection, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. A sudden splash of water (stream of water, high pressure jet washer, ...) may be identified by the system as the desire to open the vehicle.
Boot
Opening using the key
F After unlocking the vehicle with the remote control, press this button and then open the boot.
Access
2 Opening using the "Keyless Opening using the "Keyless
Entry and Starting" remote Entry and Starting" system
control
Complete unlocking
Complete unlocking
F Press this button, the vehicle is unlocked.
F Press the opening control, then raise the tailgate.
Selective unlocking
Complete unlocking is selected by default. This setting is done in the "Driving assistance" menu, then "Vehicle settings" and "Vehicle access".
F Press this button, the boot is unlocked.
F Press the opening control, then raise the tailgate.
Use this button for access to additional information.
F With the electronic key on your person in the recognition zone A, press the opening control then raise the tailgate.
Selective unlocking
By default, complete unlocking is activated. This setting is done in the "Driving assistance" menu, then "Vehicle settings" and "Vehicle access".
61
Access
When unlocking of the boot only is activated: F With the electronic key in the recognition
zone A, press the boot unlocking control to unlock just the tailgate, then raise the tailgate. Unlocking is signalled by rapid flashing of the direction indicators for a few seconds.
Locking with the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system
Tailgate release
System allowing the mechanical unlocking of the boot in the event of a battery or central locking system malfunction.
Unlocking
Use this button for access to additional information.
Closing
F Lower the tailgate using one of the interior grab handles.
If the tailgate is not closed correctly (the lock has two positions), with the engine running or when moving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)), a message appears for a few seconds.
F With the electronic key in the recognition zone A, press the boot locking control to lock the vehicle.
Locking is signalled by rapid flashing of the direction indicators for a few seconds.
F Fold back the rear seats to gain access to the lock from inside the boot.
F Insert a small screwdriver into hole A of the lock to unlock the tailgate.
F Move the latch to the right.
Locking after closing
If the fault persists after closing again, the boot will remain locked.
62
Back-up key
Unlocking / Locking using the integral key with Keyless Entry and Starting
Locking the driver's door
Access
2
Locking the passenger doors
The integral key is used to lock and unlock the vehicle when the electronic key cannot operate: - battery flat, vehicle battery discharged or
disconnected, ... - vehicle located in an area with strong
electromagnetic signals. F Maintain a pull on button 1, to extract the
integral key 2.
If the alarm is activated, the audible signal triggered on opening a door with the key (integral with the remote control) will stop when the ignition is switched on.
F Insert the integral key in the door lock, then turn it to the rear.
Unlocking the driver's door
F Insert the integral key in the door lock, then turn it to the front.
For more information on the Child lock, refer to the corresponding section.
F Open the doors. F For the rear doors, check that the child lock
is not on. F Insert the integral key in the latch located
on the edge of the door and turn it an eighth of a turn to the right for the righthand door, and to the left for the left-hand door. F Close the doors and check that the vehicle has locked correctly from the outside.
Unlocking the passenger doors
F Pull the interior door opening control.
63
Access
Changing the battery
Remote control problem reinitialisation
Following disconnection of the vehicle battery, replacement of the remote control battery or in the event of a remote control malfunction, you can no longer unlock, lock or locate your vehicle.
Battery ref.: CR2032 / 3 volts. This replacement battery is available from a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. A message appears in the instrument panel screen when replacement of the battery is needed. FUnclip the cover using a small screwdriver
at the cutout. F Lift off the cover. F Remove the flat battery from its location. F Fit the new battery into its location
observing the original direction of fitment. F Clip the cover onto the casing.
Do not throw the remote control batteries away, they contain metals which are harmful to the environment. Take them to an approved collection point.
F Place the mechanical key (integral with the remote control) in the lock to unlock your vehicle.
F Remove the mat under 12 V socket. F Place the electronic key in the housing
provided. F Switch on the ignition by pressing START/
STOP.
The electronic key is fully operational again.
If the problem persists, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
64
Access
Lost keys, remote control, electronic key
Visit a PEUGEOT dealer with the vehicle's registration certificate, your personal identification documents and if possible, the label bearing the key code. The PEUGEOT dealer will be able to retrieve the key code and the transponder code required to order a new key
Remote control
The high frequency remote control is a sensitive system; do not operate it while it is in your pocket as there is a possibility that it may unlock the vehicle, without you being aware of it. Do not repeatedly press the buttons of your remote control out of range and out of sight of your vehicle. You run the risk of stopping it from working and the remote control would have to be reinitialised. The remote control does not operate when the key is in the ignition, even when the ignition is switched off.
2
Locking the vehicle
Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency. As a safety precaution (with children on board), remove the key from the ignition or take the electronic key when you leave the vehicle, even for a short time.
Electrical interference
The Keyless Entry and Starting electronic key may not operate if close to certain electronic devices: telephone, laptop computer, strong magnetic fields, ...
Anti-theft protection
Do not make any modifications to the electronic engine immobiliser system; this could cause malfunctions. Don't forget to turn the steering to engage the steering lock.
When purchasing a second-hand vehicle
Have the key codes memorised by a PEUGEOT dealer, to ensure that the keys in your possession are the only ones which can start the vehicle.
65
Access
Locking/ unlocking from the inside
Automatic central locking of the doors
The doors can lock automatically while driving (speed above 6 mph (10 km/h)).
To activate or deactivate this function, press and hold the button until a message appears in the screen.
After unlocking, if no door is opened within 30 seconds, the doors lock again automatically.
F Press the button. This allows the doors and the boot to be locked or unlocked.
Driving with the doors locked may make access to the passenger compartment by the emergency services more difficult in an emergency.
If the vehicle is deadlocked or locked with the remote control or the door handles, the button is not active. In this case, use the key or the remote control to unlock.
When carrying large objects with the boot open, you can press this button to lock just the doors. When locking from inside, the door mirrors do not fold.
66
Access
Alarm
System which protects and provides a deterrent against theft and break-ins. It provides the following types of monitoring:
Exterior perimeter
The system checks for opening of the vehicle. The alarm is triggered if anyone tries to open a door, the boot or the bonnet.
Interior volumetric
The system checks for any variation in the volume in the passenger compartment. The alarm is triggered if anyone breaks a window, enters the passenger compartment or moves inside the vehicle.
For vehicles fitted with the system, the volumetric monitoring is not compatible with programmed temperature preconditioning.
Tilt*
The system checks for movement of the vehicle on the ground. The alarm is triggered if the vehicle is lifted, moved or collided with.
Self-protection function
The system checks for the disconnection of any of its components. The alarm is triggered if the battery, the button or the wires of the siren are disconnected or damaged.
For all work on the alarm system, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Locking the vehicle with full alarm system
Activation
F Switch off the ignition and get out of the vehicle. F Lock the vehicle using the remote control.
2
or
F Lock the vehicle using the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system.
The monitoring system is active: the indicator lamp in the button flashes once per second and the direction indicators come on for about 2 seconds. After an instruction to lock the vehicle using the remote control or the Keyless Entry and Starting system, the exterior perimeter monitoring is activated after a delay of 5 seconds, the interior volumetric monitoring after 45 seconds. If an opening (door, boot, bonnet...) is not closed fully, the vehicle is not locked but monitoring will be activated after a delay of 45 seconds.
* On GT and GTi versions. 67
Access
Deactivation
F Press this unlocking button on the remote control.
or FUnlock the vehicle using the "Keyless Entry
and Starting" system.
The monitoring system is deactivated: the indicator lamp in the button goes off and the direction indicators flash for about 2 seconds.
If the vehicle self-locks automatically (occurs after 30 seconds if a door or the boot is not opened), the monitoring system is not reactivated automatically. To reactivate the system, it is necessary to unlock and then lock the vehicle again, using the remote control or the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system.
Locking the vehicle with exterior perimeter monitoring only
Deactivate the interior volumetric monitoring (and tilt monitoring if your vehicle has it) to avoid unwanted triggering of the alarm in certain cases such as: - occupant(s) present in the vehicle, - leaving a window partially open, - washing your vehicle, - changing a wheel, - towing your vehicle, - transport on a ferry.
Deactivating the volumetric monitoring
The tilt alarm is deactivated as well, if your vehicle has it.
F Switch of the ignition and within ten seconds press this button until its indicator lamp is on fixed.
FGet out of the vehicle.
F Immediately lock the vehicle using the remote control or the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system.
Only the exterior perimeter protection system is active: the indicator lamp in the button flashes once per second. To be taken into account, this deactivation must be done every time the ignition is switched off.
68
Access
Reactivating the volumetric monitoring
The tilt alarm is reactivated as well, if your vehicle has it.
F Deactivate the exterior perimeter monitoring by unlocking the vehicle using the remote control or the Keyless Entry and Starting system.
The indicator lamp in the button goes off. F Reactivate the full alarm system by locking the vehicle using the remote control or the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system.
The indicator lamp in the button flashes once per second again.
Triggering of the alarm
This is indicated by sounding of the siren and flashing of the direction indicators for thirty seconds. The monitoring functions remain active until the alarm has been triggered eleven times in succession.
When the vehicle is unlocked using the remote control or the Keyless Entry and Starting system, rapid flashing of the indicator lamp in the button informs you that the alarm was triggered during your absence. When the ignition is switched on, this flashing stops immediately.
Failure of the remote control
To deactivate the monitoring functions: FUnlock the vehicle using the key (integral
with the remote control) in the driver's door lock. F Open the door; the alarm is triggered. F Switch on the ignition; the alarm stops. The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
Locking the vehicle without activating the alarm
F Lock or deadlock the vehicle using the key (integral with the remote control) in the driver's door lock.
2
Operating fault
When the ignition is switched on, fixed illumination of the indicator lamp in the button indicates a fault in the system.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Automatic activation
This function is either not available, an option or is standard. 2 minutes after the last door or the boot is closed, the system is activated automatically.
FTo avoid triggering the alarm on entering the vehicle, first press the unlocking button on the remote control or unlock the vehicle using the Keyless Entry and Starting system.
69
Access
Electric windows
1. Front left. 2. Front right 3. Rear right. 4. Rear left. 5. Deactivating the rear electric window
switches.
Maintaining the locking action (on the key or the remote control) closes the windows automatically.
Manual operation
To open or close the window, press or pull the switch gently. The window stops as soon as the switch is released.
Automatic one-touch operation (depending on version)
To open or close the window, press or pull the switch fully: the window opens or closes completely when the switch is released. Pressing the switch again stops the movement of the window.
Safety anti-pinch (depending on version)
When the window rises and meets an obstacle, it stops and immediately partially lowers again.
In the event of unwanted opening of the window when closing automatically, press the switch until the window opens completely, then pull the switch immediately until the window closes. Continue to hold the switch for approximately one second after the window has closed.
The safety anti-pinch function is not active during this operation.
The electric window switches remain operational for approximately one minute after the key has been removed. Once this time has elapsed, the electric windows will not operate. To reactivate them, switch the ignition on again.
70
Deactivating the rear window controls
For the safety of your children, press this switch to prevent operation of the windows of the rear doors, irrespective of their position.
With the indicator lamp on, the rear switches are deactivated. With the indicator lamp off, the switches are active.
Reinitialising the electric windows
Following reconnection of the battery, the safety anti-pinch function must be reinitialised. The safety anti-pinch is not active during these operations: - lower the window completely, then raise
it, it will rise in steps of a few centimetres each time the switch is pressed. Repeat the operation until the window closes completely, - press and hold the switch upwards for at least one second after reaching this position, window closed.
Always remove the key when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time. In the event of contact during operation of the windows, you must reverse the movement of the window. To do this, press the switch concerned. When operating the passenger electric window switches, the driver must ensure that no one is preventing correct closing of the windows. The driver must ensure that the passengers use the electric windows correctly. Be aware of children when operating the windows.
Access
2
71
Ease of use and comfort
PEUGEOT i-Cockpit
Before moving the seat backwards, ensure that there is nothing that might prevent the full travel of the seat, so as to avoid the risk of jamming the seat caused by the presence of objects on the floor behind the seat or rear passengers. If the seat jams, stop the movement immediately.
Steering wheel adjustment
Before taking to the road and to make the most of the special ergonomics of the PEUGEOT i-Cockpit, carry out these adjustments in the following order: - head restraint height, - backrest angle, - seat cushion height, - seat longitudinal position, - steering wheel reach and then height - the interior and door mirrors.
Once these adjustments have been made, ensure that from your driving position you can see the "head-up" instrument panel clearly, over the reduced diameter steering wheel.
F When stationary, lower the control lever to release the steering wheel adjustment mechanism.
F Adjust the height and reach to suit your driving position.
F Pull the control lever to lock the steering wheel adjustment mechanism.
As a safety precaution, these operations should only be carried out while the vehicle is stationary.
72
Front seats with manual adjustments
As a safety measure, seat adjustments should only be carried out when stationary.
Forwards-backwards
Height
Ease of use and comfort
Backrest angle
3
F Raise the control and slide the seat forwards or backwards.
F Pull the control upwards to raise or push it downwards to lower, as many times as required, to obtain the position required.
Before moving the seat backwards, ensure that there is nothing that might prevent the full travel of the seat, so as to avoid the risk of jamming the seat caused by the presence of objects on the floor behind the seat or rear passengers. If the seat jams, stop the movement immediately.
FTurn the knob to adjust the backrest.
Lumbar
FTurn the knob manually to obtain the desired level of lumbar support.
73
Ease of use and comfort
Electric driver's seat
Forwards-backwards
Seat backrest angle
Seat cushion height and angle
F Push the control forwards or rearwards to slide the seat.
FTilt the control forwards or rearwards to adjust the angle of the seat backrest.
Before moving the seat backwards, ensure that there is nothing that might prevent the full travel of the seat, so as to avoid the risk of jamming the seat caused by the presence of objects on the floor behind the seat or rear passengers. If the seat jams, stop the movement immediately.
FTip the rear of the control upwards or downwards to obtain the desired height.
FTip the front of the control upwards or downwards to obtain the desired angle.
To avoid discharging the battery, carry out these adjustments with the engine running.
74
Storing driving positions
System which registers the electrical settings of the driver's seat. Two positions can be stored and recalled, using the buttons on the side of the driver's seat.
Storing a position using buttons M / 1 / 2
F Switch on the ignition. F Adjust your seat. F Press button M, then press button 1 or 2
within four seconds. An audible signal indicates that the position has been stored. Storing a new position cancels the previous position.
Recalling a stored position
F With the ignition on or the engine running, press button 1 or 2 to recall the corresponding position.
An audible signal confirms that adjustment is complete. You can interrupt the current movement by pressing button M, 1 or 2 or by using one of the seat controls. A stored position cannot be recalled while driving. Recalling stored positions is deactivated 45 seconds after switching off the ignition.
Ease of use and comfort
3
75
Ease of use and comfort
Additional adjustments
Heated seats
With the engine running, the front seats can be heated separately. FUse the adjustment thumbwheel to switch
on and select the desired level of heating: 0: Off. 1: Low. 2: Medium. 3: High.
Do not use the function if the seat is not occupied. Reduce the level of heating as soon as possible. Once the seat and passenger compartment are at a comfortable temperature, you can switch off the function; reducing electric current consumption also reduces fuel consumption.
76
Prolonged use at the highest setting is not recommended for those with sensitive skin. There is a risk of burns for those that do not have normal perception of heat (illness, taking medicines, ...). There is a risk of overheating the system if material with insulating properties is used, such as cushions or seat covers. Do not use the system: - if wearing damp clothing, - if child seats are fitted. To avoid breaking the heating element in the seat: - do not place heavy objects on the
seat, - do not kneel or stand on the seat, - do not place sharp objects on the
seat, - do not spill liquids onto the seat. To avoid the risk of short-circuit: - do not use liquid products for
cleaning the seat, - never use the heating function
when the seat is damp.
Ease of use and comfort
Head restraint height
FTo raise the head restraint, pull it upwards. FTo remove the head restraint, press the
lug A and pull the head restraint upwards. FTo put the head restraint back in place,
engage the head restraint stems in the openings keeping them in line with the seat backrest. FTo lower the head restraint, press the lug A and the head restraint at the same time.
The head restraint is fitted with a frame with notches which prevents it from lowering; this is a safety device in case of impact. The adjustment is correct when the upper edge of the head restraint is level with the top of the head. Never drive with the head restraints removed; they must be in place and adjusted correctly.
Electric lumbar adjustment
3
F Press the control to obtain the desired lumbar support.
77
Ease of use and comfort
Massage function
This system provides the occupants of the front seats with a lumbar massage. It only operates when the engine is running or in STOP mode of the Stop & Start system.
Activation / Deactivation
Adjustment of intensity
F Press this button. Its indicator lamp comes on and the massage function is activated for a period of 1 hour. During this time, massage is performed in 6 cycles of 10 minutes (6 minutes of massage followed by 4 minutes break). After one hour, the function is deactivated, the indicator lamp goes off. Deactivate the massage function by pressing this button; its indicator lamp goes off.
78
F Press this button to adjust the intensity of the massage.
Two levels of massage are available.
Ease of use and comfort
Rear seats (hatchback)
Rear seats with fixed one-piece cushion and 1/3 - 2/3 split backrests which can be folded individually to adapt the load space in the boot.
Folding the backrest
Repositioning the seat backrest
3
F Move the corresponding front seat forward if necessary.
F Check that the corresponding outer seat belt is positioned correctly against the backrest and buckle it.
F Place the head restraints in the low position.
F Press control 1 to release the seat backrest 2.
F Fold the seat backrest 2 on to the cushion 3.
When folding the seat, the centre seat belt should not be fastened, but laid out flat on the seat
The rear seat cushion does not fold, just the seat backrest can be folded to increase the boot loading space.
F Straighten the seat backrest 2 and secure it. F Check that the red indicator, located next to
the control 1, is no longer visible. FUnbuckle and reposition the outer seat belt
on the side of the backrest.
When repositioning the seat backrest, take care not to trap the seat belts.
79
Ease of use and comfort
Rear seats (SW)
1/3 - 2/3 split rear seats which can be folded to vary the boot load space.
Folding the seat from the boot
Each section of the seat (1/3 or 2/3) has its own control to release the seat backrest from inside the boot.
Folding the seat from the rear
F Check that nothing is preventing the seat backrest from folding (seat belts, ...) and that no object might interfere with the seat manoeuvre (above as well as below).
F Place the head restraints in the low position.
F Pull the control from inside the boot, the seat backrest folds onto the cushion.
F Check that nothing is preventing the seat backrest folding and that no object might interfere with the seat manoeuvre (above as well as below).
F Move the corresponding front seat forwards if necessary.
F Check that the seat belt is positioned correctly on the side of the seat backrest.
F Place the head restraints in the low position.
80
Ease of use and comfort
Returning the seat back to its original position
Outer rear seat head restraints
These have one position for use (up) and a stowed position (down). They can be removed and are interchangeable.
3
F Pull the control 1 forwards, the seat backrest folds onto the cushion.
F Put the seat backrest in the upright position and secure it.
F Check that the red indicator, located at the control 1, is no longer visible.
F Refit the head restraints or put them back in place.
To remove a head restraint: F pull the head restraint upwards to the stop, F then, press the lug A.
When returning the rear seat back to its original position, take care not to trap the seat belts and ensure that their buckles are positioned correctly.
The centre head restraint is not adjustable.
Never drive with the head restraints removed; they must be in place and correctly adjusted.
81
Ease of use and comfort
Interior fittings
1. Cooled glove box fitted with a ventilation nozzle
2. 12 V accessory socket (120 W) Observe the maximum power rating to avoid damaging your accessory.
3.USB port 4. Jack auxiliary socket 5. Cup holder (depending on version) 6. Storage (depending on version) 7. Storage - Retractable cup holder Turn the carrier for access to the cup
holder. 8. Front armrest 9. 230 V (120 W) accessory socket
Observe the power rating to avoid damaging your accessory.
82
Mats
Fitting
When fitting the mat for the first time, on the driver's side use only the fixings provided in the wallet attached. The other mats are simply placed on the carpet.
Removal
To remove the mat on the driver's side: F move the seat as far back as possible, F unclip the fixings, F remove the mat.
Refitting
To refit the mat on the driver's side: F position the mat correctly, F refit the fixings by pressing, F check that the mat is secured correctly.
To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - only use mats which are suited to
the fixings already present in the vehicle; these fixings must be used, - never fit one mat on top of another. The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT may interfere with access to the pedals and hinder the operation of the cruise control / speed limiter. The mats approved by PEUGEOT have two fixings located below the seat.
Ease of use and comfort
3
83
Ease of use and comfort
Front armrest
The height and longitudinal position of the armrest cover can be adjusted for greater comfort.
Height adjustment
Longitudinal adjustment
12 V accessory socket
F Raise the cover to the required position (low, intermediate or high).
F If you raise the cover slightly beyond the high position, guide it when lowering it to the low position.
84
F Slide the cover fully forwards or rearwards.
Storage
FTo connect a 12 V accessory (maximum power: 120 Watts), lift the cover and connect a suitable adaptor.
Observe the maximum power rating to avoid damaging your accessory.
F Raise the lever. F Raise the cover fully.
The connection of an electrical device not approved by PEUGEOT, such as a USB charger, may adversely affect the operation of vehicle electrical systems, causing faults such as poor telephone reception or interference with displays in the screens.
USB port
Ease of use and comfort
Jack auxiliary socket
230 V / 50 Hz power socket
A 230 V / 50 Hz socket (maximum power: 120 W) is fitted in the rear storage box. This socket works with the engine running, as well as in STOP mode with Stop & Start.
3
It allows the connection of a portable device, such as a digital audio player of the iPod® type or a USB memory stick. It reads the audio files which are transmitted to your audio system and played via the vehicle's speakers. You can manage these files using the steering mounted controls or the audio system.
When a USB port is used, the portable device charges automatically. While charging, a message is displayed if the current consumption of the portable device exceeds the power rating of the port. For more information on using this equipment, refer to the Audio and telematics section.
It permits the connection of a portable device so that you can listen to your music files via the vehicle's speakers. The management of the files is done using your portable device.
For more information on the use of this equipment, refer to the Audio and telematics section.
F Open the central storage box, F Check that the warning lamp is on green, F Connect your multimedia or other electrical
device (telephone charger, laptop computer, CD-DVD player, baby food warmer...).
In the event of a fault with the socket, the green warning lamp flashes. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
85
Ease of use and comfort
Connect only one device at a time to the socket (no extension or multi-way connector). Connect only devices with class II insulation (shown on the device). Do not use a device with a metal case. As a safety measure, when electrical consumption is high and when required by the vehicle's electrical system (particular weather conditions, electrical overload...), the current supply to the socket will be cut off; the green warning lamp goes off.
The different "ports and sockets" can be either not available, an option or standard, depending on the trim level of the vehicle.
Rear armrest
F Lower the rear armrest for a more comfortable position.
It may be fitted with cup holders and also gives access to the ski flap.
Ski flap
It allows long objects to be carried in the vehicle.
F Lower the armrest. F Press the flap opening control. F Lower the flap. F Load the objects from inside the boot.
Do not leave the flap open when not carrying long objects in the vehicle.
86
Boot fittings (hatchback)
1. Rear parcel shelf 2. Boot floor
Raise the floor for access to the storage. 3. Storage wells
in which are stowed: - the towing eye, - the temporary puncture repair kit, - the spare wheel, depending on trim
level, an option or standard. 4. Stowing rings 5. Strap (depending on version)
Ease of use and comfort
3
87
Ease of use and comfort
Boot fittings (SW)
1. Boot lamp 2. Rear seat folding controls 3. 12 V accessory socket (120 W max) 4. Removable storage boxes
Pull up to unclip them. 5. Storage wells, in which are stowed:
- the towing eye, - the temporary puncture repair kit, - the spare wheel, depending on trim
level, an option or standard. 6. Luggage cover
(see corresponding section)
7.Eyes for fixing a net (to restrain luggage) (depending on version)
FExtract the eyes one at a time then slide them into the oblong housing.
F While pressing the button, move the eye to the desired position.
F Observe the direction of fitting (eyes in the vertical position towards the outside of the vehicle).
88
Luggage cover, roller blind (SW)
To reel in
To remove
Ease of use and comfort
Storage
3
F Remove the roller guide from the rails in the boot pillars.
F Release the roller blind, it reels in automatically.
F Place a hand on the left under the luggage cover.
FTurn the end of the reel towards the front (clockwise) to release it.
F Repeat the operation on the right (anticlockwise).
A recess in the floor well, under the boot carpet, allows the luggage cover to be stowed diagonally.
This recess is not available with the bass woofer unit.
89
Ease of use and comfort
To install
High load (SW)
Luggage retaining net
This allows the use of the entire loading volume up to the roof: - behind the front seats (row 1) when the rear seats are folded. - behind the rear seats (row 2).
F Position the left and then right-hand ends of the luggage cover in their respective housings.
F Place your hands on the roller then turn the assembly to the rear to secure it.
FUnreel the roller blind until it locks on the rear pillar.
Row 1
F Fold the rear seats. F Remove the cover on each side of the roof. F Position the net's upper hooks in the roof. F Attach the bottom of the net to the fixings
located at the seat belt mountings. F Pull on the straps to stretch the net. Once fitted, the net does not prevent folding of the rear seat backrests.
Row 2
F Remove the cover on each side of the roof. F Position the net's upper hooks in the roof. F Attach the bottom of the net to the rings
located either side of the boot carpet or on the boot rails (depending on trim level). F Pull on the straps to stretch the net.
90
Heating and Ventilation
Air intake
The air circulating in the passenger compartment is filtered and originates either from the outside via the grille located at the base of the windscreen or from the inside in air recirculation mode.
Controls
The incoming air follows various routes depending on the controls selected by the driver, the front passenger and rear passengers, according to the level of equipment. The temperature control enables you to obtain the level of comfort required by mixing the air of the various circuits. The air distribution control enables you to select the air vents used in the passenger compartment by the combined use of the associated buttons. The air flow control enables you to increase or reduce the speed of the ventilation fan. Depending on your vehicle, the controls are accessible in the "Air conditioning" menu of the touch screen or are grouped together on control panel on the centre console.
Air distribution
1. Windscreen demisting/defrosting vents. 2. Front side window demisting/defrosting
vents. 3. Side adjustable air vents.
Ease of use and comfort
3
4. Central adjustable air vents. 5. Air outlets to the front footwells. 6. Air outlets to the rear footwells.
91
Ease of use and comfort
Recommendations for ventilation and air conditioning
In order for these systems to be fully effective, follow the operation and maintenance guidelines below: FTo obtain an even air distribution, take care not to obstruct the exterior air intake grilles
located at the base of the windscreen, the nozzles, the vents and the air outlets, as well as the air extractor located in the boot. F Do not cover the sunshine sensor, located on the dashboard; this is used for regulation of the air conditioning system. F Operate the air conditioning system for at least 5 to 10 minutes, once or twice a month to keep it in perfect working order. FEnsure that the passenger compartment filter is in good condition and have the filter elements replaced regularly. We recommend the use of a combined passenger compartment filter. Thanks to its special active additive, it contributes to the purification of the air breathed by the occupants and the cleanliness of the passenger compartment (reduction of allergic symptoms, bad odours and greasy deposits). FTo ensure correct operation of the air conditioning system, you are also advised to have it checked regularly as recommended in the warranty and maintenance record. F If the system does not produce cold air, switch it off and contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
When towing the maximum load on a steep gradient in high temperatures, switching off the air conditioning increases the available engine power and so improves the towing ability.
If after an extended stop in sunshine, the interior temperature is very high, first ventilate the passenger compartment for a few moments. Put the air flow control at a setting high enough to quickly change the air in the passenger compartment. The air conditioning system does not contain chlorine and does not present any danger to the ozone layer.
The condensation created by the air conditioning results in a discharge of water under the vehicle which is perfectly normal.
Stop & Start
The heating and air conditioning systems only work when the engine is running. To maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment, you can temporarily deactivate the Stop & Start system. For more information on Stop & Start, refer to the corresponding section.
92
Manual air conditioning
The air conditioning system only operates with the engine running.
Ease of use and comfort
Air conditioning On / Off
Temperature adjustment
FTurn the dial from blue (cold) to red (hot) to adjust the temperature to your requirements.
Air distribution adjustment
Windscreen and side windows.
Air flow adjustment
FTurn the dial to obtain a comfortable air flow.
Central and side vents. Footwells.
If you put the air flow control in the minimum position(system off), the temperature is no longer controlled. However, a slight flow of air can still be felt, resulting from the movement of the vehicle.
The air distribution can be adapted by adding the corresponding buttons.
The air conditioning is designed to operate effectively in all seasons, with the windows closed.
It enables you to: - lower the temperature, in summer, - increase the effectiveness of the demisting
in winter, above 3°C.
3
Switching on
F Press this button; its indicator lamp comes on.
The air conditioning does not operate when the air flow adjustment is set to off.
To obtain cool air more quickly, you can use interior air recirculation for a few moments. Then return to the intake of exterior air.
Switching off
F Press this button again; its indicator lamp goes off.
Switching off the air conditioning may result in some discomfort (humidity, misting).
93
Ease of use and comfort
Manual air conditioning (Touch screen)
The air conditioning system operates with the engine running.
Press the button for the "Air conditioning" menu to display the system controls page.
Temperature adjustment
F Press one of these buttons to reduce or increase the value.
Air distribution adjustment
These buttons are used to arrange the distribution of air in the passenger compartment by combining several air outlets.
Windscreen.
Air flow adjustment
Press one of these buttons to increase or decrease the speed of the air booster fan.
Central and side vents. Footwells.
The air flow symbol (a fan) fills progressively according to the quantity of air wanted. By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are stopping ventilation.
Avoid driving too long without ventilation (risk of misting and deterioration of air quality).
The air distribution can be adapted by using several buttons: illumination of the indicator lamp confirms the presence of fan boosted air in the direction indicated, the indicator lamp off indicates the absence of fan boosted air in the direction indicated. For a uniform distribution of air in the passenger compartment, the three buttons can be activated simultaneously.
94
Ease of use and comfort
Air conditioning On / Off
The air conditioning is designed to operate effectively in all seasons, with the windows closed. It enables you to: - lower the temperature, in summer, - increase the effectiveness of the demisting in winter, above 3°C.
Switching on
F Press this button, its indicator lamp comes on.
The air conditioning does not operate when the air flow adjustment is set to off.
To obtain cool air more quickly, you can use interior air recirculation for a few moments. Then return to the intake of exterior air.
Dual-zone digital air conditioning (Touch screen)
This air conditioning system operates with the engine running, but the ventilation and its controls are available with the ignition on. Operation of the air conditioning and regulation of temperature, air flow and air distribution in the passenger compartment are automatic according to the temperature in the passenger compartment and the temperature setting.
Press the button for the "Air conditioning" menu to display the controls for the air conditioning system.
Temperature adjustment
The driver and front passenger can each set the temperature.
F Press one of these buttons to increase the value.
F Press one of these buttons to decrease the value.
The value displayed corresponds to a level of comfort and not to a precise temperature. It is recommended that you avoid a difference between the left and right setting of more than 3.
3
Switching off
F Press this button again, its indicator lamp goes off.
Switching off the air conditioning may result in some discomfort (humidity, misting).
95
Ease of use and comfort
Automatic comfort programme
F Press the "AUTO" button to activate or deactivate the automatic mode of the air conditioning system.
To change the current setting, shown by the green indicator lamp, press the button for the desired mode:
When the indicator lamp in the button is on, the air conditioning system operates automatically: the system manages the temperature, air flow and air distribution in the passenger compartment in an optimum way depending on the comfort level you have selected.
It is possible to modulate the intensity of the automatic comfort programme by choosing one of three mode settings offered in the secondary page of the "Air conditioning" menu.
"Soft": provides soft and quiet operation by limiting air flow.
"Normal": offers the best compromise between a comfortable temperature and quiet operation (default setting).
This setting is associated with AUTO mode only. However, on deactivation of AUTO mode, the indicator for the last setting remains on. Changing the setting does not reactivate AUTO mode if deactivated.
In cold conditions and when the engine is cold, to limit distribution of cold air in the passenger compartment, the air flow will change gradually until the comfort setting is reached. On entering the vehicle, if the interior temperature is much colder or warmer than the comfort value setting, there is no need to alter the value displayed in order to reach the required level of comfort more quickly. The system automatically corrects the temperature difference.
"Fast": provides strong and effective air flow.
96
Ease of use and comfort
Resuming manual control
You can manually adjust one or more settings, while retaining automatic control of the other functions: - air flow, - air distribution.
As soon as you modify a setting, the indicator lamp in the "AUTO" button goes off.
F Press the "AUTO" button again to activate the automatic comfort programme again.
Air flow adjustment
F Press one of these buttons to increase or decrease the speed of the booster fan.
The air flow symbol (a fan) is filled in progressively in relation to the quantity of air wanted. By reducing the air flow to minimum, you are stopping ventilation. "OFF" is displayed alongside the fan.
Avoid driving for too long with the ventilation off (risk of misting and deterioration of air quality).
Air distribution adjustment
You can modulate the distribution of air in the passenger compartment using these three buttons.
Windscreen.
3
Centre and side vents.
Footwells.
Each press on a button activates or deactivates the function. The indicator lamp is on when the button is activated. For a uniform distribution in the passenger compartment, all three buttons can be pressed simultaneously.
In AUTO mode, the indicator lamps in all three buttons are off.
97
Ease of use and comfort
Air conditioning On / Off
The air conditioning is designed to operate efficiently in all seasons, with the windows closed.
It allows you: - in summer, to lower the temperature, - in winter, above 3 °C, to improve demisting.
Switching on
F Press the "A/C" button to activate the air conditioning.
When the indicator lamp under the button is on, the air conditioning function is activated. The air conditioning cannot operate when the air flow is set to off.
Ventilation with "ignition on" function
With the ignition on, you can use the ventilation system and access the "Air conditioning" menu to adjust the air flow and air distribution in the passenger compartment. This function is available for a few minutes, depending on the state of charge of the battery of your vehicle.
This function does not activate the air conditioning. You can make use of the residual heat in the engine to warm the passenger compartment using the temperature setting buttons.
"Mono" function
The comfort setting for the passenger's side can be indexed to the driver's comfort setting (mono-zone).
From the secondary page of the "Air conditioning" menu:
F Press this button to activate / deactivate the "Mono" function.
The indicator lamp in the button is on when the function is activated.
The function is deactivated automatically when the passenger uses their temperature setting buttons.
Switching off
F Press the "A/C" button again to deactivate the air conditioning.
When the indicator lamp under the button is off, the air conditioning function is deactivated.
98
Air intake / Air recirculation
F Press this button to recirculate the interior air. Its indicator lamp comes on.
F Press the button again to allow fresh air into the passenger compartment. Its indicator lamp goes off.
The intake of exterior air avoids misting of the windscreen and side windows. The recirculation of interior air insulates the passenger compartment from exterior odours and smoke.
This allows hot or cold air to be delivered quickly when required.
Return to exterior air intake as soon as possible to prevent deterioration of the air quality and the formation of mist.
Ease of use and comfort
3
99
Ease of use and comfort
Front demist - defrost
These markings on the control panel indicate the control positions for rapid demisting or defrosting of the windscreen and side windows.
With manual air conditioning
With manual or dual-zone digital air conditioning
(with the touch screen)
F Put the air flow, temperature and distribution controls to the dedicated marked position.
F Press the "A/C" button for air conditioning; the indicator lamp in the button comes on.
F Press this button to demist or defrost the windscreen and side windows as quickly as possible.
The system automatically manages the air conditioning, air flow and air intake, and provides optimum distribution towards the windscreen and side windows. FTo stop, press this button again or
on "AUTO".
The system reverts to the previous settings.
100
With Stop & Start, when demisting has been activated, the STOP mode is not available.
Rear screen demist - defrost
Switching off
The demisting/defrosting switches off automatically to prevent an excessive consumption of current.
F It is possible to stop the demisting/defrosting operation before it is switched off automatically by pressing the button again.
The indicator lamp associated with the button goes off.
Switching on
F Press this button to demist/ defrost the rear screen and (depending on version) the door mirrors.
The indicator lamp associated with the button comes on.
Switch off the heating of the rear screen and door mirrors as soon as you judge it possible, as reducing the consumption of electrical current reduces fuel consumption.
The rear screen demist - defrost can only operate when the engine is running.
Ease of use and comfort
3
101
Ease of use and comfort
Panoramic sunroof
Its electric blind improves thermal and acoustic comfort.
Electric blind
Opening
Closing
F Press the back of the control without going beyond the point of resistance.
The blind stops when your release the control.
F Press the front of the control without going beyond the point of resistance.
The blind stops when your release the control.
You can also press or pull the control beyond the point of resistance: the blind opens or closes completely after you release the control. Operating the control again stops the movement of the blind.
Anti-pinch
If the blind encounters an obstacle, you should reverse the movement. Use the control to do this.
Remember to always switch off the ignition when leaving the vehicle, even for a short time. When operating the control, the driver should ensure that there is nothing preventing movement of the blind. The driver must ensure that passengers use the blind correctly. Be aware of children when operating the blind.
102
Courtesy lamps
1. Front courtesy lamp 2. Front map reading lamps
3. Rear courtesy lamp 4. Rear map reading lamps
Ease of use and comfort
Front - rear courtesy lamps
In this position, the courtesy lamp comes on gradually:
- when the vehicle is unlocked, - when the electronic key is removed from
the reader, - when opening a door, - when the remote control locking button is
used, in order to locate your vehicle. It switches off gradually: - when the vehicle is locked, - when the ignition is switched on, - 30 seconds after the last door is closed.
Permanently off.
Front - rear map reading lamps
F With the ignition on, press the corresponding switch.
Take care to avoid leaving anything in contact with the courtesy lamps.
3
With the "permanent lighting" mode, the lighting time varies according to the circumstances: - with the ignition off, approximately
tenminutes, - in energy economy mode, approximately
thirty seconds, - with the engine running, unlimited.
Permanent lighting.
Depending on version, you can also switch the courtesy lamp on or off by pressing this button.
103
Ease of use and comfort
Footwell lighting
Switching on
Its operation is identical to that of the courtesy lamps. The lamps comes on when one of the doors is opened.
Interior mood lighting
The dimmed passenger compartment lighting improves visibility in the vehicle when the light is poor.
Switching on
At night, the illumination of the interior opening controls on the front doors comes on automatically when the sidelamps are switched on. The interior mood lighting switches off automatically when the sidelamps are switched off.
The brightness of the interior mood lighting can be adjusted in the "Driving assistance" menu. F Select the "Vehicle settings" menu. F Check the "Mood lighting" line.
Press on the "magnifying glass" to adjust the brightness.
104
Lighting and visibility
Mirrors
Door mirrors
Adjustment
Each fitted with an adjustable mirror glass providing the lateral rearward vision necessary for overtaking or parking. They can also be folded for parking in confined spaces.
Demisting - Defrosting
Demisting-defrosting of the door mirrors operates with the engine running, by switching on the heated rear screen.
For more information on Demisting Defrosting the rear screen, refer to the corresponding section.
F Move control A to the right or to the left to select the corresponding mirror.
F Move control B in all four directions to adjust.
F Return control A to the central position.
As a safety measure, the mirrors should be adjusted to reduce the "blind spots". The objects observed are, in reality, closer than they appear. Take this into account in order to correctly judge the distance of vehicles approaching from behind.
Folding
F From outside: lock the vehicle using the electronic key or the Keyless Entry and Starting system.
F From inside: with the ignition on, pull the control A in the central position rearwards.
If the mirrors are folded using control A, they will not unfold when the vehicle is unlocked. Pull again on control A.
4
Unfolding
F From outside: unlock the vehicle using the electronic key or the Keyless Entry and Starting system.
F From inside: with the ignition on, pull the control A in the central position rearwards.
The folding and unfolding of the door mirrors using the remote control can be deactivated by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
If necessary, it is possible to fold the mirrors manually.
105
Lighting and visibility
Rear view mirror
Equipped with an anti-dazzle system, which darkens the mirror glass and reduces the nuisance to the driver caused by the sun, headlamps from other vehicles...
Manual model
Automatic "electrochrome" model
Adjustment F Adjust the mirror so that the glass is
directed correctly in the "day" position.
Day / night position F Pull the lever to change to the "night" anti-
dazzle position. F Push the lever to change to the normal
"day" position.
This system automatically and progressively changes between the day and night uses by means of a sensor, which measures the light from the rear of the vehicle.
In order to ensure optimum visibility during your manoeuvres, the mirror lightens automatically when reverse gear is engaged.
106
Lighting and visibility
Lighting control stalk
Selection and control of the various front and rear lamps providing the vehicle's lighting and signalling.
Main lighting
There are various lamps on the vehicle: - sidelamps, to be seen, - dipped beam headlamps to see without
dazzling other drivers, - main beam headlamps to see clearly when
the road is clear, - daytime running lamps at the front, to be
seen during the day.
Additional lighting
Other lamps are installed to fulfil the requirements of particular driving conditions: - rear foglamps, to better signal the
presence of the vehicle in foggy conditions, - front foglamps, for better visibility in foggy
conditions and to improve lighting at intersections and when parking,
Automatic lighting functions
Various automatic lighting functions are also available depending on options: - guide-me-home lighting (remotely), - welcome lighting, - daytime running lamps, - automatic illumination of headlamps.
4
Programming
You can adjust the settings of certain functions: - guide-me-home lighting (remotely), - welcome lighting.
In some weather conditions (e.g. low temperature or humidity), the presence of misting on the internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal; it disappears after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.
Travelling abroad
Halogen headlamps
If using your vehicle in a country that drives on the other side of the road, the headlamps must be adjusted to avoid dazzling on-coming drivers. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
LED headlamps
The design of the LED headlamps allows you to use your vehicle in a country that drives on the other side of the road without any adjustment.
107
Lighting and visibility
Selection of main lighting mode
Turn the ring to align the desired symbol with the marking.
Without AUTO lighting
With AUTO lighting
108
Dipping the headlamps
Lighting off (ignition off) / Front daytime running lamps (engine running).
Automatic illumination of headlamps.
Sidelamps only. Dipped or main beam headlamps.
Pull the stalk to switch the lighting between dipped and main beam headlamps.
In the lighting off and sidelamps modes, the driver can switch on the main beam headlamps temporarily ("headlamp flash") by maintaining a pull on the stalk.
Display
Illumination of the corresponding indicator lamp in the instrument panel confirms the lighting switched on.
Lighting and visibility
Foglamps
4
Rear foglamp only
The dipped or main beam headlamps must be on. FTo switch it on, turn the ring forwards. When the lighting is switched off automatically (with AUTO model), the foglamp goes off. FTo switch it off, turn the ring rearwards.
Front and rear foglamps
The front and rear foglamps operate with the sidelamps or dipped beam on (in manual or auto mode). Rotate and release the ring: F forwards once to switch on the front
foglamps, F forwards again to switch on the rear
foglamps, F rearwards once to switch off the rear
foglamps, F rearwards again to switch off the front fog
lamps.
When the headlamps switch off with automatic illumination of headlamps (AUTO model) or when the dipped beam headlamps are switched off manually, the foglamps and sidelamps remain on. FTurn the ring rearwards to switch off
the foglamps, the sidelamps will then switch off.
109
Lighting and visibility
In good or rainy weather, by both day and night, the front foglamps and the rear foglamps are prohibited. In these situations, the power of their beams may dazzle other drivers. They should only be used in fog or falling snow. In these weather conditions, you should switch on the foglamps and dipped beam headlamps manually, as the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient light. Do not forget to switch off the front and rear foglamps when they are no longer necessary.
110
Front daytime running lamps (light-emitting diodes)
Switching off the lighting when switching off the ignition
When the ignition is switched off, all of the lamps switch off immediately, except for the dipped beam headlamps if automatic guide-me-home lighting is activated.
Switching on the lighting when switching on the ignition
To reactivate the lighting control stalk, turn the ring A to position "0" - lighting off, then to the position of your choice. When the driver's door is opened, a temporary audible signal warns you that the vehicle's lighting is on. They switch off automatically after a period which depends on the state of charge of the battery (entry to energy economy mode).
They come on automatically when the engine is started, when the lighting control stalk is in position "0" or "AUTO".
Lighting and visibility
Automatic illumination of headlamps
When a low level of ambient light is detected by a sunshine sensor, the number plate lamps, sidelamps and dipped beam headlamps are switched on automatically, without any action on the part of the driver. They can also come on if rain is detected, at the same time as automatic operation of the windscreen wipers. As soon as the brightness returns to a sufficient level or after the windscreen wipers are switched off, the lamps are switched off automatically.
Activation
FTurn the ring to the "AUTO" position. The activation of the function is accompanied by the display of a message.
Deactivation
FTurn the ring to another position. Deactivation of the function is accompanied by the display of a message.
Operating fault
In the event of a malfunction of the sunshine sensor, the lighting comes on; this warning lamp is displayed in the instrument panel accompanied by an audible signal and/or a message.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
In fog or snow, the sunshine sensor may detect sufficient light. In this case, the lighting will not come on automatically. Do not cover the sunshine sensor, coupled with the rain sensor and located in the top of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror; the associated functions would no longer be controlled.
Guide-me-home lighting
Manual
4
Temporarily keeping the dipped beam headlamps on after the vehicle's ignition has been switched off makes the driver's exit easier when the light is poor.
Switching on F With the ignition off, "flash" the headlamps
using the lighting stalk. F Another "headlamp flash" switches the
function off.
Switching off The manual guide-me-home lighting switches off automatically after a set time.
111
Lighting and visibility
Automatic
When the automatic illumination of headlamps function is activated (lighting control stalk in the "AUTO" position), under low ambient light the dipped beams headlamps come on automatically when the ignition is switched off.
Activation or deactivation, as well as the duration of the guide-mehome lighting, is set in the "Driving assistance" menu, then "Vehicle settings" in the secondary page.
Exterior welcome lighting
The remote switching on of the lighting makes your approach to the vehicle easier in poor light. It is activated when the lighting control is in the "AUTO" position and the level of light detected by the sunshine sensor is low.
Direction indicators
Switching on
F Press the open padlock on the remote control or one of the front door handles with Keyless Entry and Starting.
The dipped beam headlamps and sidelamps come on; your vehicle is also unlocked.
Switching off
The exterior welcome lighting switches off automatically after a set time, when the ignition is switched on or on locking the vehicle.
Programming
The activation, deactivation and choice of welcome lighting duration are done in the "Driving assistance" menu then "Vehicle settings".
F Left: lower the lighting stalk passing the point of resistance.
F Right: raise the lighting stalk passing the point of resistance.
Three flashes of the direction indicators
F Press briefly upwards or downwards, without going beyond the point of resistance; the direction indicators will flash 3 times.
112
Door mirror spotlamps
Lighting and visibility
Headlamp beam height adjustment
Manual adjustment of halogen headlamps
Automatic adjustment of "Full LED" technology headlamps
4
To make your approach to the vehicle easier, these illuminate: - the zones facing the driver's and
passenger's doors, - the zones forward of the door mirrors and
rearward of the front doors.
Switching on
When the courtesy lamp is in this position, the spotlamps come on automatically: - when you unlock the vehicle, - when you switch off the ignition, - when you open a door, - when you use the remote control to locate the vehicle.
Switching off
They are timed to go off automatically.
To avoid causing a nuisance to other road users, the beams of the halogen headlamps should be adjusted according to the load in the vehicle. 0 Driver or driver + front passenger. - Driver + front passenger + rear
passengers. 1 5 people. - 5 people + a load in the boot. 2 Driver + a load in the boot.
The initial setting is position "0".
This system automatically adjusts the height of the beams from this type of headlamp, according to the load in the vehicle, to avoid causing a nuisance to other road users.
If a fault occurs, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by a message and an audible signal.
The system then places the headlamp beams in the lowest position.
Do not touch the "Full LED" technology headlamps. Risk of electrocution! Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
113
Lighting and visibility
Wiper control stalk
Programming
Your vehicle may also include some functions that can be configured: - automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers, - rear wiping on engaging reverse gear.
Manual controls
The wipers are controlled directly by the driver.
Windscreen wipers
Wiping speed control stalk: raise or lower the stalk to the desired position.
Fast wipe (heavy rain).
In wintry conditions, remove snow, ice or frost present on the windscreen, around the wiper arms and blades and the windscreen seal, before operating the wipers.
With manual wiping (intermittent)
Do not operate the wipers on a dry windscreen. Under extremely hot or cold conditions, ensure that the wiper blades are not stuck to the windscreen before operating the wipers.
With AUTO wiping
Normal wipe (moderate rain).
Intermittent wipe (proportional to the speed of the vehicle). Park.
Single wipe (press downwards or pull the stalk briefly towards you, then release). or
Automatic wiping (press down, then release). Single wipe (pull the stalk briefly towards you).
114
Rear wiper
Rear wiper selection ring: Park. Intermittent wipe. Wash-wipe (set duration).
Lighting and visibility
Reverse gear
When reverse gear is engaged, the rear wiper will come into operation automatically if the windscreen wipers are operating. Activation or deactivation of this automatic function can be set in the touch screen.
Windscreen and headlamp wash
F Select the "Driving assistance" menu, then "Vehicle settings".
This function is activated by default.
If a significant accumulation of snow or ice is present, or when using a bicycle carrier on the boot, deactivate the automatic rear wiper.
F Pull the windscreen wiper stalk towards you. The screenwash then the wipers operate for a fixed period.
The headlamp wash is only activated if the dipped headlamps are on and the vehicle is moving. With daytime running lamps, to activate the headlamp wash, position the lighting stalk in the dipped beam position.
4
On vehicles fitted with automatic air conditioning, any action on the windscreen wash control results in temporary closing of the air intake to avoid odours inside the passenger compartment.
115
Lighting and visibility
Screenwash/headlamp wash level low
In the case of vehicles fitted with headlamp washers, when the fluid reservoir low level is reached this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible signal and a message.
The warning lamp comes on when the ignition is switched on, or every time the stalk is operated, until the reservoir is refilled. Next time you stop, refill the screenwash / headlamp wash reservoir.
Automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers
The windscreen wipers operate automatically, without any action on the part of the driver, if rain is detected (sensor behind the rear view mirror), adapting their speed to the intensity of the rainfall.
Switching on
The automatic rain sensitive windscreen wipers must be reactivated by pushing the control stalk downwards, if the ignition has been off for more than one minute.
Briefly push the control stalk downwards. A wiping cycle confirms that the instruction has been accepted. This warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and a message is displayed.
Switching off
Briefly push the control stalk downwards again, or place the control stalk in another position (Int, 1 or 2). This warning lamp goes off in the instrument panel and a message is displayed.
Operating fault
If a fault occurs with the automatic rain sensitive wipers, the wipers will operate in intermittent mode. Have it checked by PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Do not cover the rain sensor, linked with the sunshine sensor and located in the centre of the windscreen behind the rear view mirror. Switch off the automatic rain sensitive wipers when using an automatic car wash. In winter, it is advisable to wait until the windscreen is completely clear of ice before activating the automatic rain sensitive wipers.
116
Lighting and visibility
Special position of the windscreen wipers
This position permits release of the windscreen wiper blades. It is used for cleaning or replacement of the wiper blades. It can also be useful, in winter, to release the wiper blades from the windscreen.
F Any action on the wiper stalk within one minute after switching off the ignition places the wiper blades vertically on the screen.
FTo park the wiper blades again, switch on the ignition and operate the wiper stalk.
To maintain the effectiveness of the flat wiper blades, it is advisable to: - handle them with care, - clean them regularly using soapy
water, - avoid using them to retain
cardboard on the windscreen, - replace them at the first signs of
wear.
Heated windscreen and washer jets*
This function heats the windscreen and washer jets under cold conditions.
4
In area 1, the heating frees the wiper blades when they are stuck by snow or ice. In area 2, the heating improves visibility by avoiding the accumulation of snow when the wipers are operating.
Switching on
F With the engine running, press this button; its indicator lamp comes on.
The period of operation depends on the ambient temperature. Pressing this button again switches the function off; its indicator lamp goes off. * Depending on the country of sale.
117
Safety
Hazard warning lamps
Visual warning with all of the direction indicators flashing to alert other road users to a vehicle breakdown, towing or accident.
Automatic operation of hazard warning lamps
When braking in an emergency, depending on the rate of deceleration, as well as when the ABS regulation is invoked or in the event of an impact, the hazard warning lamps come on automatically. They switch off automatically the first time you accelerate. F You can also switch them off by pressing
the button.
F Press this button, all of the direction indicators flash.
They can operate with the ignition off.
118
Safety
Emergency or assistance call
PEUGEOT Connect SOS
In an emergency, press this button for more than 2 seconds. Flashing of the green LED and a voice message confirm that the call has been made to the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" call centre*.
If an impact is detected by the airbag control unit, and independently of the deployment of any airbags, an emergency call is made automatically.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The green LED goes off.
The green LED remains on (without flashing) when communication is established. It goes off at the end of the call.
If you benefit from the PEUGEOT Connect Packs offer with the SOS and assistance pack included, there are additional services available to you in your MyPEUGEOT personal space, via the Internet website for your country.
5
"PEUGEOT Connect SOS" immediately locates your vehicle, starts communication with you in your language**, and where necessary sends the appropriate public emergency services**. In countries where the service is not available, or when the locating service has been expressly declined, the call is sent directly to the emergency services (112) without the vehicle location.
* S ubject to the general conditions for the service available from dealers and subject to technological and technical limitations.
** Depending on the geographical cover of "PEUGEOT Connect SOS", "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" and the official national language selected by the owner of the vehicle. The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT CONNECT services is available from dealers or at www.peugeot.co.uk.
119
Safety
Operation of the system
When the ignition is switched on, the green LED comes on for 3 seconds indicating that the system is operating correctly.
For all countries except Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan.
The red indicator lamp flashes then goes off: there is a system fault. The red indicator lamp is on continuously: replace the back-up battery.
For Russia, Belarus and Kazakhstan. The red indicator lamp is on continuously: there is a system fault.
The red indicator lamp flashes: replace the back-up battery.
In either case, the emergency and assistance calls may not function. Contact a qualified repairer as soon as possible.
A fault with the system does not prevent the vehicle being driven.
PEUGEOT Connect Assistance
Press this button for more than 2 seconds to request assistance if the vehicle breaks down. A voice message confirms that the call has been made**.
Pressing this button again immediately cancels the request. The cancellation is confirmed by a voice message.
If you purchased your vehicle outside the PEUGEOT dealer network, we invite you to have a dealer check the configuration of these services and, if desired, modified to suit your wishes. In a multi-lingual country, configuration is possible in the official national language of your choice.
Geo-location
You can deactivate geo-location by simultaneously pressing the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" and "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" buttons, followed by a press on "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" to confirm. To reactivate geo-location, simultaneously press the "PEUGEOT Connect SOS" and "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" buttons again, followed by a press on "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" to confirm.
For technical reasons and in particular to improve the quality of "PEUGEOT CONNECT services" services to customers, the manufacturer reserves the right to carry out updates to the vehicle's on-board telematic system.
** Depending on the geographical cover of "PEUGEOT Connect SOS", "PEUGEOT Connect Assistance" and the official national language selected by the owner of the vehicle. The list of countries covered and PEUGEOT CONNECT services is available from dealers or at www.peugeot.co.uk.
120
Horn
F Press the central part of the steering wheel.
Safety
Electronic stability control (ESC)
Electronic stability control (ESC) incorporating the following systems: - anti-lock braking system (ABS) and
electronic brake force distribution (EBFD), - emergency braking assistance (EBA), - wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR) or traction
control, - dynamic stability control (DSC).
Emergency braking assistance (EBA)
In an emergency, this system enables you to reach the optimum braking pressure more quickly and therefore reduce the stopping distance. It is triggered according to the speed at which the brake pedal is pressed. This is felt by a reduction in the resistance of the pedal and an increase in the effectiveness of the braking.
Definitions
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)
This system improves the stability and manoeuvrability of your vehicle when braking and contributes towards improved control on corners, in particular on poor or slippery road surfaces. The ABS prevents wheel lock in the event of emergency braking. The EBFD manages the braking pressure wheel by wheel.
Anti-slip regulation (ASR)
The ASR system (also known as Traction Control) optimises traction in order to limit wheel slip by acting on the brakes of the driving wheels and on the engine. It also improves the directional stability of the vehicle on acceleration.
Dynamic stability control (DSC)
If there is a difference between the path followed by the vehicle and that required by the driver, the DSC monitors each wheel and automatically acts on the brake of one or more wheels and on the engine to return the vehicle to the required path, within the limits of the laws of physics.
5
121
Safety
Intelligent traction control system
Depending on version, your vehicle has a system to help driving on snow: intelligent traction control. This system detects situations of difficult surface grip that could make it difficult to move off or make progress on deep fresh snow or compacted snow. In these situations, the intelligent traction control limits the amount of wheel spin to provide the best traction and trajectory control for your vehicle.
The use of snow tyres is strongly recommended on surfaces offering low levels of adhesion.
Anti-lock braking system (ABS) and electronic brake force distribution (EBFD)
The fixed illumination of this warning lamp indicates that there is a fault with the ABS.
The vehicle retains conventional braking. Drive carefully at moderate speed.
When this warning lamp comes on, coupled with the STOP and ABS warning lamps, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, it indicates that there is a fault with the electronic brake force distribution (EBFD).
You must stop as soon as it is safe to do so. In both cases, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible.
When changing wheels (tyres and rims), ensure that these are approved for your vehicle. Normal operation of the ABS may make itself felt by slight vibrations of the brake pedal.
In emergency braking, press very firmly and maintain this pressure.
122
Safety
Dynamic stability control (DSC) and anti-slip regulation (ASR) Activation
These systems are activated automatically each time the vehicle is started. As soon as they detect a problem of grip or trajectory, these systems act on the operation of the engine and brakes.
This is indicated by flashing of this warning lamp in the instrument panel.
Deactivation
In exceptional conditions (starting a vehicle which is bogged down, stuck in snow, on soft ground...), it may be advisable to deactivate the DSC system, so that the wheels can spin freely and regain grip.
It is however recommended that the system be reactivated as soon as possible.
F Press the button.
This warning lamp and the indicator lamp in the button come on: the DSC system no longer acts on the operation of the engine.
Reactivation
The system is reactivated automatically each time the ignition is switched back on or from 30 mph (50 km/h) (except GT and GTi versions).
F Press the button again to reactivate it manually.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, this indicates a fault with the system.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked.
The DSC system offers exceptional safety in normal driving, but this should not encourage the driver to take extra risks or drive at high speed. The correct operation of the system depends on observation of the manufacturer's recommendations regarding the wheels (tyres and rims), the braking components, the electronic components and the assembly and repair procedures used by PEUGEOT dealers. To fully benefit from the effectiveness of these systems in wintry conditions, it is essential to fit a set of four winter tyres to the vehicle. This will allow the vehicle to retain a neutral behaviour. After an impact, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
5
123
Safety
Seat belts
Front seat belts
Rear seat belts
Fastening
The rear seats are each fitted with a seat belt, three-point anchorages with inertia reel and force limiter (except for the centre rear seat).
The front seat belts are fitted with a pretensioning and force limiting system. This system improves safety in the front seats in the event of a front or side impact. Depending on the severity of the impact, the pretensioning system instantly tightens the seat belts against the body of the occupants. The pretensioning seat belts are active when the ignition is on. The force limiter reduces the pressure of the seat belt on the chest of the occupant, so improving their protection.
F Pull the strap, then insert the tongue in the buckle.
F Check that the seat belt is fastened correctly by pulling the strap.
Unfastening
F Press the red button on the buckle. FGuide the seat belt as it reels in.
124
Seat belt not fastened/ unfastened warning lamps
From approximately 12 mph (20 km/h), the warning lamp(s) flash for two minutes accompanied by an audible signal. Once these two minutes have elapsed, the warning lamp(s) remain on until the driver or one or more passengers fasten their seat belt.
1. Front and/or rear seat belts not fastened/ unfastened warning lamp in the instrument panel.
2. Front left seat belt warning lamp. 3. Front right seat belt warning lamp. 4. Rear right seat belt warning lamp. 5. Rear centre seat belt warning lamp. 6. Rear left seat belt warning lamp.
Front and rear seat belt warning lamps
On switching on the ignition, warning lamp 1 comes on in the instrument panel and the corresponding warning lamp (2 to 6) comes on in red in the passenger's seat belt and front airbag warning lamp display if the corresponding seat belt is not fastened or is unfastened.
If a rear seatbelt is not fastened, the corresponding warning lamp (4 to 6) comes on for about 30 seconds.
Safety
5
125
Safety
Advice
The driver must ensure that passengers use the seat belts correctly and that they are all fastened before setting off. Wherever you are seated in the vehicle, always fasten your seat belt, even for short journeys. Do not interchange the seat belt buckles as they will not fulfill their role fully. The seat belts are fitted with an inertia reel permitting automatic adjustment of the length of the strap to your size. The seat belt is stowed automatically when not in use. Before and after use, ensure that the seat belt is reeled in correctly. The lower part of the strap must be positioned as low as possible on the pelvis. The upper part must be positioned in the hollow of the shoulder. The inertia reels are fitted with an automatic locking device which comes into operation in the event of a collision, emergency braking or if the vehicle rolls over. You can release the device by pulling the strap firmly and then releasing it so that it reels in slightly.
In order to be effective, a seat belt must: - be tightened as close to the body as
possible, - be pulled in front of you with a smooth
movement, checking that it does not twist, - be used to restrain only one person, - not bear any trace of cuts or fraying, - not be converted or modified to avoid affecting its performance. In accordance with current safety regulations, for all repairs on your vehicle's seat belts, go to a qualified workshop with the skills and equipment needed, which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide. Have your seat belts checked regularly by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, particularly if the straps show signs of damage. Clean the seat belt straps with soapy water or a textile cleaning product, sold by PEUGEOT dealers. After folding or moving a seat or rear bench seat, ensure that the seat belt is positioned and reeled in correctly.
Recommendations for children
Use a suitable child seat if the passenger is less than 12 years old or shorter than one and a half metres. Never use the same seat belt to secure more than one person. Never allow a child to travel on your lap. For more information on Child seats, refer to the corresponding section.
In the event of an impact
Depending on the nature and seriousness of the impact, the pretensioning device may be deployed before and independently of the airbags. Deployment of the pretensioners is accompanied by a slight discharge of harmless smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system. In all cases, the airbag warning lamp comes on. Following an impact, have the seat belts system checked, and if necessary replaced, by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
126
Safety
Airbags
General information
System designed to contribute towards improving the safety of the occupants (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of violent collisions. The airbags supplement the action of the seat belts fitted with force limiters (all except the centre rear passenger belt). If a collision occurs, the electronic detectors record and analyse the front and side impacts sustained in the impact detection zones: - in the case of a serious impact, the airbags
are deployed instantly and contribute towards better protection of the occupants of the vehicle (with the exception of the rear centre passenger); immediately after the impact, the airbags deflate rapidly so that they do not hinder visibility or the exit of the occupants, - in the case of a minor or rear impact or in certain roll-over conditions, the airbags may not be deployed; the seat belt alone contributes towards ensuring your protection in these situations.
The airbags do not operate when the ignition is switched off. This equipment will only deploy once. If a second impact occurs (during the same or a subsequent accident), the airbag will not be deployed again.
Impact detection zones
A. Front impact zone. B. Side impact zone.
Deployment of one or more of the airbags is accompanied by a slight emission of smoke and a noise, due to the activation of the pyrotechnic cartridge incorporated in the system. This smoke is not harmful, but sensitive individuals may experience slight irritation. The noise of detonation associated with the deployment of one or more airbags may result in a slight loss of hearing for a short time.
Front airbags
System which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious front impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the head and thorax. The driver's airbag is fitted in the centre of the steering wheel; the front passenger's airbag is fitted in the dashboard above the glove box.
5
Deployment
The airbags are deployed, except the passenger's front airbag if it is deactivated, in the event of a serious front impact to all or part of the front impact zone A, in the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the front to the rear of the vehicle. The front airbag inflates between the thorax and head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the steering wheel, driver's side, and the dashboard, passenger's side to cushion their forward movement.
127
Safety
Deactivating the passenger's front airbag
Only the passenger's front airbag can be deactivated.
To assure the safety of your child, the passenger's front airbag must be deactivated when you install a rearward facing child seat on the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were deployed.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked. The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.
Reactivating the passenger's front airbag
When you remove the child seat, with the ignition off, turn the switch to the "ON" position to reactivate the airbag and so assure the safety of your front passenger in the event of an impact.
F With the ignition off, insert the key in the passenger airbag deactivation switch.
FTurn it to the "OFF" position. F Remove the key keeping the switch in the
new position.
When the ignition is switched on, this warning lamp comes on in the seat belt warning display screen for approximately one minute to signal that the front airbag is activated.
When the ignition is on, this warning lamp comes in the seat belt warning display screen. It stays on while the airbag is deactivated.
128
Safety
Lateral airbags
If fitted to your vehicle, this is a system which protects the driver and front passenger in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the chest, between the abdomen and head. Each lateral airbag is fitted in the seat backrest frame, door side.
Deployment
The lateral airbags are deployed unilaterally in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone, perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle. The lateral airbag inflates between the abdomen and head of the front occupant of the vehicle and the corresponding door trim panel.
Curtain airbags
System contributing towards greater protection for the driver and passengers (with the exception of the rear centre passenger) in the event of a serious side impact in order to limit the risk of injury to the side of the head. Each curtain airbag is built into the pillars and the upper passenger compartment area.
Deployment
The curtain airbag is deployed at the same time as the corresponding lateral airbag in the event of a serious side impact applied to all or part of the side impact zone B, perpendicular to the longitudinal centreline of the vehicle on a horizontal plane and directed from the outside towards the inside of the vehicle. The curtain airbag inflates between the front or rear occupant of the vehicle and the windows.
Operating fault
If this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, you must contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked.
The airbags may no longer be deployed in the event of a serious impact.
In the event of a minor impact or bump on the side of the vehicle or if the vehicle rolls over, the airbags may not be deployed. In the event of a rear or front collision, none of the lateral airbags is deployed.
5
129
Safety
For the airbags to be fully effective, observe the following safety rules:
Sit in a normal upright position. Wear a correctly adjusted seat belt. Do not leave anything between the occupants and the airbags (a child, pet, object...), nor fix or attach anything close to the inflation trajectory of the airbags; this could cause injuries during their deployment. Never modify the original definition of your vehicle, particularly in the area directly around the airbags. After an accident or if the vehicle has been stolen or broken into, have the airbag systems checked. All work on the airbag system must be carried out by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Even if all of the precautions mentioned are observed, a risk of injury or of minor burns to the head, chest or arms when an airbag is deployed cannot be ruled out. The bag inflates almost instantly (within a few milliseconds) then deflates within the same time discharging the hot gas via openings provided for this purpose.
Front airbags
Do not drive holding the steering wheel by its spokes or resting your hands on the centre part of the wheel. Passengers must not place their feet on the dashboard. Do not smoke as deployment of the airbags can cause burns or the risk of injury from a cigarette or pipe. Never remove or pierce the steering wheel or hit it violently. Do not fit or attach anything to the steering wheel or dashboard, this could cause injuries with deployment of the airbags.
Curtain airbags
Do not fix or attach anything to the roof. This could cause injury to the head if the curtain airbag is deployed. If fitted on your vehicle, do not remove the grab handles installed on the roof, they play a part in securing the curtain airbags.
Lateral airbags
Use only approved covers on the seats, compatible with the deployment the lateral airbags. For information on the range of seat covers suitable for your vehicle, you can contact a PEUGEOT dealer. For more information on Accessories, refer to the corresponding section. Do not fix or attach anything to the seat backrests (clothing...). This could cause injury to the chest or arms if the lateral airbag is deployed. Do not sit with the upper part of the body any nearer to the door than necessary.
The vehicle's front door panels include side impact sensors. A damaged door or any unauthorised or incorrectly executed work (modification or repair) on the front doors or their interior trim could compromise the operation of these sensors - Risk of malfunction of the lateral airbags! Such work must only be done by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
130
Carrying children
General points
Although one of PEUGEOT's main criteria when designing your vehicle, the safety of your children also depends on you.
For maximum safety, please observe the following recommendations: - in accordance with European regulations,
all children under the age of 12 or less than one and a half metres tall must travel in approved child seats suited to their weight, on seats fitted with a seat belt or ISOFIX mountings*, - statistically, the safest seats in your vehicle for carrying children are the rear seats, - a child weighing less than 9 kg must travel in the rearward facing position both in the front and in the rear.
PEUGEOT recommends that children should travel on the rear seats of your vehicle: - rearward facing up to the age of 3, - forward facing over the age of 3.
* The regulations on carrying children are specific to each country. Refer to the legislation in force in your country.
Safety
5
131
Safety
Child seat at the rear
Rearward facing
Forward facing
Centre rear seat
A child seat with a support leg must never be installed on the centre rear passenger seat.
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the protection of the child in the event of an accident.
When a rearward facing child seat is installed on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's front seat forward and straighten the backrest so that the rearward facing child seat does not touch the vehicle's front seat.
When a forward facing child seat is installed on a rear passenger seat, move the vehicle's front seat forward and straighten the backrest so that the legs of the child in the forward facing child seat do not touch the vehicle's front seat.
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly tensioned. For child seats with a support leg, ensure that this is in firm contact with the floor. If necessary, adjust the front seat of the vehicle.
132
Safety
Child seat at the front*
Rearward facing
Forward facing
When a rearward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, adjust the seat to the fully back and highest position, with the backrest straightened. The passenger's front airbag must be deactivated. Otherwise, the child risks being seriously injured or killed if the airbag is deployed.
* Refer to the legislation in force in your country before carrying your child in this seating position.
When a forward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, adjust the vehicle's seat to the fully back and highest position with the seat backrest straightened and leave the passenger's front airbag activated.
Ensure that the seat belt is correctly tensioned. For child seats with a support leg, ensure that the support leg is in firm and stable contact with the floor. If necessary, adjust the passenger seat.
Passenger seat in the fully back and highest position.
5
133
Safety
Deactivating the passenger front airbag
Never install a rearward facing child restraint system on a seat protected by an active front airbag. This could cause the death of the child or serious injury.
The warning label present on both sides of the passenger sun visor repeats this advice. In line with current legislation, the following tables contain this warning in all of the languages required.
Passenger airbag OFF
For more information on the Airbags, refer to the corresponding section.
134
Safety
AR
BG . .
CS NIKDY neumisujte dtské zádrzné zaízení orientované smrem dozadu na sedadlo chránné AKTIVOVANÝM celním AIRBAGEM. Hrozí nebezpecí SMRTI DÍTTE nebo VÁZNÉHO ZRANNÍ.
DA Brug ALDRIG en bagudvendt barnestol på et sæde, der er beskyttet af en AKTIV AIRBAG. BARNET risikerer at blive ALVORLIGT KVÆSTET eller DRÆBT.
DE Montieren Sie auf einem Sitz mit AKTIVIERTEM Front-Airbag NIEMALS einen Kindersitz oder eine Babyschale entgegen der Fahrtrichtung, das Kind könnte schwere oder sogar tödliche Verletzungen erleiden.
EL , .
EN NEVER use a rearward facing child restraint on a seat protected by an ACTIVE AIRBAG in front of it, DEATH or SERIOUS INJURY to the CHILD can occur
ES NO INSTALAR NUNCA un sistema de retención para niños de espaldas al sentido de la marcha en un asiento protegido mediante un AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO, ya que podría causar lesiones GRAVES o incluso la MUERTE del niño.
ET Ärge MITTE KUNAGI paigaldage "seljaga sõidusuunas" lapseistet juhi kõrvalistmele, mille ESITURVAPADI on AKTIVEERITUD. Turvapadja avanemine võib last TÕSISELT või ELUOHTLIKULT vigastada.
FI ÄLÄ KOSKAAN aseta lapsen turvaistuinta selkä ajosuuntaan istuimelle, jonka edessä suojana on käyttöön aktivoitu TURVATYYNY. Sen laukeaminen voi aiheuttaa LAPSEN KUOLEMAN tai VAKAVAN LOUKKAANTUMISEN.
FR NE JAMAIS installer de système de retenue pour enfants faisant face vers l'arrière sur un siège protégé par un COUSSIN GONFLABLE frontal ACTIVÉ. Cela peut provoquer la MORT de l'ENFANT ou le BLESSER GRAVEMENT
HR NIKADA ne postavljati djecju sjedalicu leima u smjeru voznje na sjedalo zastieno UKLJUCENIM prednjim ZRACNIM JASTUKOM. To bi moglo uzrokovati SMRT ili TESKU OZLJEDU djeteta.
HU SOHA ne használjon menetiránynak háttal beszerelt gyermekülést AKTIVÁLT (BEKAPCSOLT) FRONTLÉGZSÁKKAL védett ülésen. Ez a gyermek HALÁLÁT vagy SÚLYOS SÉRÜLÉSÉT okozhatja.
IT NON installare MAI seggiolini per bambini posizionati in senso contrario a quello di marcia su un sedile protetto da un AIRBAG frontale ATTIVATO. Ciò potrebbe provocare la MORTE o FERITE GRAVI al bambino.
LT NIEKADA nerenkite vaiko prilaikymo priemons su atgal atgrztu vaiku ant sdyns, kuri saugoma VEIKIANCIOS priekins ORO PAGALVS. Issiskleidus oro pagalvei vaikas gali bti MIRTINAI arba SUNKIAI TRAUMUOTAS.
5
135
Safety
LV NEKAD NEuzstdiet uz aizmuguri vrstu brnu sdeklti prieksj pasaziera sdviet, kur ir AKTIVIZTS prieksjais DROSBAS GAISA SPILVENS. Tas var izraist BRNA NVI vai radt NOPIETNUS IEVAINOJUMUS.
MT Qatt m'ghandek thalli tifel/tifla marbut f'siggu dahru lejn l-Airbag attiva, ghaliex tista' tikkawza korriment serju jew anke mewt lit-tifel/tifla NL Plaats NOOIT een kinderzitje met de rug in de rijrichting op een zitplaats waarvan de AIRBAG is INGESCHAKELD. Bij het afgaan van de
airbag kan het KIND LEVENSGEVAARLIJK GEWOND RAKEN NO Installer ALDRI et barnesete med ryggen mot kjøreretningen i et sete som er beskyttet med en frontal AKTIVERT KOLLISJONSPUTE,
BARNET risikerer å bli DREPT eller HARDT SKADET. PL NIGDY nie instalowa fotelika dziecicego w pozycji "tylem do kierunku jazdy" na siedzeniu wyposaonym w CZOLOW PODUSZK
POWIETRZN w stanie AKTYWNYM. Moe to doprowadzi do MIERCI DZIECKA lub spowodowa u niego POWANE OBRAENIA CIALA. PT NUNCA instale um sistema de retenção para crianças de costas para a estrada num banco protegido por um AIRBAG frontal ACTIVADO. Esta instalação poderá provocar FERIMENTOS GRAVES ou a MORTE da CRIANÇA. RO Nu instalati NICIODATA un sistem de retinere pentru copii, dispus cu spatele in directia de mers, pe un loc din vehicul protejat cu AIRBAG frontal ACTIVAT. Aceasta ar putea provoca MOARTEA COPILULUI sau RANIREA lui GRAVA. RU , , . SK NIKDY neinstalujte detské zádrzné zariadenie orientované smerom dozadu na sedadlo chránené AKTIVOVANÝM celným AIRBAGOM. Mohlo by dôjs k SMRTENÉMU alebo VÁZNEMU PORANENIU DIEAA. SL NIKOLI ne namescajte otroskega sedeza s hrbtom v smeri voznje, ce je VARNOSTNA BLAZINA pred sprednjim sopotnikovim sedezem AKTIVIRANA. Taksna namestitev lahko povzroci SMRT OTROKA ali HUDE POSKODBE. SR NIKADA ne koristite decje sediste koje se okree unazad na sedistu zastienim AKTIVNIM VAZDUSNIM JASTUKOM ispred njega, jer mogu nastupiti SMRT ili OZBILJNA POVREDA DETETA. SV Passagerarkrockkudden fram MÅSTE vara avaktiverad om en bakåtvänd bilbarnstol installeras på denna plats. Annars riskerar barnet att DÖDAS eller SKADAS ALLVARLIGT. TR KESNLKLE HAVA YASTII AKTF olan ön koltua yüzü arkaya dönük bir çocuk koltuu yerletirmeyiniz. Bu ÇOCUUN ÖLMESNE veya ÇOK AIR YARALANMASINA sebep olabilir.
136
Child seats recommended by PEUGEOT
PEUGEOT offers a range of recommended child seats which are secured using a three point seat belt.
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
Groups 2 and 3: from 15 to 36 kg
Safety
L1 "RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" Installed in the rearward facing position.
L4 "KLIPPAN Optima" From 22 kg (approximately 6 years), the booster is used on its own.
L5 "RÖMER KIDFIX" Can be fitted to the vehicle's ISOFIX mountings. The child is restrained by the seat belt.
5
137
Safety
Locations for child seats secured with the seat belt
In accordance with the European legislation, this table indicates the options for the installation of child seats secured using the seat belt and universally approved (a) in relation to the weight of the child and the seat in the vehicle.
Weight of the child / indicative age
Seat
Front passenger seat (c) (d) - with height adjustment - without height adjustment
(straightening the backrest)
Less than 13 kg (groups 0 (b) and 0+) Up to approx. 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg (group 1)
From approx. 1 to 3 years
From 15 to 25 kg (group 2)
From approx. 3 to 6 years
From 22 to 36 kg (group 3)
From approx. 6 to 10 years
U (R) U (R)
U (R) U (R)
U (R) U (R)
U (R) U (R)
Hatchback
Outer rear seats (e)
U
U
U
U
Centre rear seat (e)
U (f)
U (f)
X
X
Outer rear seats (e) Centre rear seat (e) 138
SW
U
U
U
U
X
X
X
X
Safety
U Seat suitable for the installation of a child seat secured using the seat belt and universally approved rearward facing and/or forward facing.
U(R) As for U, the vehicle seat must be adjusted to the highest and fully back position.
X Seat not suitable for the installation of a child seat of the weight group indicated.
(a)Universal child seat: child seat which can be installed in all vehicles using the seat belt.
(b)Group 0: from birth to 10 kg. Infant car seats and "car cots" cannot be installed on the front passenger seat.
(c) Consult the legislation in force in your country before installing your child on this seat.
(d) When a rearward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, the passenger's front airbag must be deactivated. Otherwise the child risks being seriously injured or killed if the airbag is deployed. When a forward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat, leave the passenger's front airbag active.
(e)To install a child seat on a rear seat, rearward or forward facing, move the front seat forward, then straighten the backrest to allow enough room for the child seat and the child's legs.
(f) A child seat with support leg must never be installed on the centre rear passenger seat.
Remove and stow the head restraint before fitting a child seat with a backrest to a passenger seat. Refit the head restraint when the child seat is removed.
5
139
Safety
"ISOFIX" mountings
Your vehicle has been approved to the latest ISOFIX regulations. The seats shown below are fitted with regulation ISOFIX mountings.
There are three rings for each seat. Two rings A, located between the seat backrest and cushion, indicated by an ISOFIX marking.
These rings are located behind covers (hatchback) or clear closures (SW). For access to them: FUnclip the covers by pulling them
forward then pivot them upward (hatchback). F Pull the clear closures up to open them (SW).
A ring B is located in the boot (indicated by a marking), referred to as the TOP TETHER, for fixing the upper strap. The TOP TETHER is used to secure the upper strap of child seats that have them. This limits the forward tipping of the child seat in the event of a frontal impact. The TOP TETHER is located on the boot floor behind the seat backrest.
Do not use the luggage net rings (hatchback) or lashing rings (SW), located at the edges of the boot floor.
140
This ISOFIX mounting system provides fast, reliable and safe fitting of the child seat in your vehicle. The ISOFIX child seats are fitted with two latches which are easily secured on the two rings A. Some also have an upper strap which is attached to ring B.
To secure the child seat to the TOP TETHER: - remove and stow the head restraint before
installing the child seat on the vehicle seat (refit it when the child seat is removed), - pass the child seat upper strap over the top of the seat backrest, centring it between the apertures for the head restraint rods, - attach the upper strap to the ring B, - tighten the upper strap.
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's protection in the event of an accident. Observe strictly the fitting instructions provided with the child seat.
For information regarding the ISOFIX child seats which can be installed in your vehicle, refer to the table showing the locations for installing ISOFIX child seats.
If your vehicle has a spare wheel of the same size as the four wheels, follow the procedure below: F pass the strap and buckle over the boot
floor (in the slot), F raise the boot floor, F lift out the upper storage box, located
alongside the wheel, F attach the spring hook to the TOP TETHER
ring, F refit the storage box and boot floor.
Safety
5
141
Safety
ISOFIX child seats recommended by PEUGEOT
PEUGEOT offers a range of ISOFIX child seats listed and type approved for your vehicle. Refer also to the child seat manufacturer's fitting instructions for information on installing and removing the seat.
"RÖMER Baby-Safe Plus" and its ISOFIX base (size category: E)
Group 0+: from birth to 13 kg
"Baby P2C Midi" and its ISOFIX base (size categories: D, C, A, B, B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
"RÖMER Duo Plus ISOFIX" (size category: B1)
Group 1: from 9 to 18 kg
Installed rearward facing using an ISOFIX base which is attached to the rings A. The base has a support leg, adjustable for height, which sits on the vehicle's floor. This child seat can also be secured with a seat belt. In this case, only the shell is used and attached to the vehicle's seat by the three-point seat belt.
Installed rearward facing using an ISOFIX base which is attached to the rings A. The base has a support leg, adjustable for height, which sits on the vehicle's floor. This child seat can also be used forward facing. This seat can not be secured with a seat belt. We recommend that you use the seat in the rearward facing position up to the age of 3 years.
Is installed only in the forward facing position. Is attached to the rings A and the upper ring B, referred to as the TOP TETHER, using an upper strap. Three seat body angles: sitting, reclining, lying down. This child seat can also be used on seats not equipped with ISOFIX mountings. In this case, it must be secured to the vehicle's seat by the three-point seat belt. Adjust the position of the vehicle's front seat so that the child's feet are not touching the backrest.
142
Safety
Locations for ISOFIX child seats
In accordance with European legislation, this table indicates the options for installing ISOFIX child seats on seats in the vehicle fitted with ISOFIX mountings. In the case of universal and semi-universal ISOFIX child seats, the ISOFIX size category, determined by a letter from A to G, is indicated on the child seat next to the ISOFIX logo.
Type of ISOFIX child seat ISOFIX size category Front passenger seat
Less than 10 kg (group 0)
Up to approx. 6 months
Cot
F
G
Weight of the child / indicative age
Less than 10 kg (group 0)
Less than 13 kg (group 0+)
Up to approx. 1 year
From 9 to 18 kg (group 1) From approx. 1 to 3 years
rearward facing
rearward facing
forward facing
C
D
E
C
D
A
B
B1
Not ISOFIX
5
Hatchback Outer rear seats Centre rear seat
IL-SU (a+b)
IL-SU (c)
IL-SU (a)
IL-SU (c)
Not ISOFIX
IL-SU (a)
IUF IL-SU
SW Outer rear seats Centre rear seat
IL-SU (a+b)
IL-SU (c)
IL-SU (a)
IL-SU (c)
Not ISOFIX
IL-SU (a)
IUF IL-SU
143
Safety
IUF Seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Universal seat, Forward facing secured using the upper strap.
IL-SU Seat suitable for the installation of an Isofix Semi-Universal seat either:
- rearward facing fitted with an upper strap or a support leg,
- forward facing fitted with a support leg, - an infant car seat fitted with an upper strap
or a support leg.
X Seat not suitable for the installation of a child seat of the weight group indicated.
(a) Move a seat without height adjustment forwards by 1 notch from the mid position forwards and backwards. A seat with height adjustment must be in the highest position.
(b)The installation of an infant carrier on one of the outer seats makes use of the other two seats impossible.
(c) A seat with height adjustment must be placed in the highest position. Move the seat without height adjustment forward by 5 notches from the mid-position forwards and backwards.
144
For more information on ISOFIX mountings and child seats and in particular the upper strap, refer to the corresponding section.
Remove and stow the head restraint before fitting a child seat with a backrest to a passenger seat. Refit the head restraint when the child seat is removed.
Child lock
This mechanical system prevents opening of a rear door using its interior control. The control is located on the edge of each rear door and locking is independent for each door.
Locking
FUsing the integral ignition key, turn the control as far as it will go: - to the left on the left-hand rear door, - to the right on the right-hand rear door.
Unlocking
FUsing the integral ignition key, turn the control as far as it will go: - to the right on the left-hand rear door, - to the left on the right-hand rear door.
Safety
Recommendations
Child seats
The incorrect installation of a child seat in a vehicle compromises the child's protection in the event of an accident. Check that there is no seat belt or seat belt buckle under the child seat as this could destabilise it. Remember to fasten the seat belts or the child seat harnesses keeping the slack in relation to the child's body to a minimum, even for short journeys. For the installation of a child seat using a seat belt, ensure that this is well tensioned on the child seat and that it is holding the child seat firmly against the seat of your vehicle. If your front passenger seat is adjustable, move it forward if necessary. At the rear seats, always leave sufficient space between the front seat and: - a rearward facing child seat, - the feet of a child seated in a forward
facing child seat. For this, move the front seat forward and if necessary straighten its backrest.
For optimum installation of the forward facing child seat, ensure that the back of the child seat is as close as possible to the backrest of the vehicle's seat, or in contact if possible. The head restraint must be removed before installing a child seat with a backrest on the passenger seat. Ensure that the head restraint is stowed or attached securely so that it is not thrown around the vehicle in the event of sharp braking. Refit the head restraint as soon as the child seat is removed.
Children at the front
The legislation on carrying a child on the front passenger seat is specific to each country. Refer to the legislation in force in the country in which you are driving. Deactivate the passenger front airbag when a rearward facing child seat is installed on the front passenger seat. Otherwise, the child would risk being seriously injured or killed if the airbag were deployed.
Installing a booster cushion
The chest part of the seat belt must be positioned on the child's shoulder without touching the neck. Ensure that the lap part of the seat belt passes correctly over the child's thighs. PEUGEOT recommends the use of a booster seat which has a back, fitted with a seat belt guide at shoulder level.
As a safety precaution, do not leave: - one or more children alone and
unsupervised in a vehicle, - a child or an animal in a vehicle which
is exposed to the sun, with the windows closed, - the keys within reach of children inside the vehicle. To prevent accidental opening of the doors, use the child lock. Take care not to open the rear windows by more than one third. To protect young children from the rays of the sun, fit side blinds on the rear windows.
5
145
Driving
Driving recommendations
Observe the driving regulations and remain vigilant whatever the traffic conditions. Pay close attention to the traffic and keep your hands on the wheel so that you are ready to react at any time to any eventuality. On a long journey, a break every two hours is strongly recommended. In difficult weather, drive smoothly, anticipate the need to brake and increase the distance from other vehicles.
If you are obliged to drive through water:
Driving on flooded roads
We strongly advise against driving on flooded roads, as this could cause serious damage to the engine or gearbox, as well as to the electrical systems of your vehicle.
- check that the depth of water does not exceed 15 cm, taking account of waves that might be generated by other users,
- deactivate the Stop & Start system, - drive as slowly as possible without
stalling. In all cases, do not exceed 6 mph (10 km/h), - do not stop and do not switch off the engine. On leaving the flooded road, as soon as circumstances allow, make several light brake applications to dry the brake discs and pads. If in doubt on the state of your vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Important!
Never drive with the parking brake applied - Risk of overheating and damage to the braking system! Risk of fire! As the exhaust system of your vehicle is very hot, even several minutes after switching off the engine, do not park or run the engine over areas where inflammable substances and materials are present: grass, leaves, etc.
Never leave a vehicle unsupervised with the engine running. If you have to leave your vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brake and put the gearbox into neutral or position N or P, depending on the type of gearbox.
146
Driving
When towing
Distribution of loads
F Distribute the load in the trailer so that the heaviest items are as close as possible to the axle and the nose weight approaches the maximum permitted without exceeding it.
Air density decreases with altitude, thus reducing engine performance. Above 1 000 metres, the maximum towed load must be reduced by 10 % for every 1 000 metres of altitude.
For more information on Weights, refer to the corresponding section.
Side wind
FTake into account the increased sensitivity to side wind.
Cooling
Towing a trailer on a slope increases the temperature of the coolant. As the fan is electrically controlled, its cooling capacity is not dependent on the engine speed. FTo lower the engine speed, reduce your
speed. The maximum towed load on a long incline depends on the gradient and the ambient temperature. In all cases, keep a check on the coolant temperature.
F If the warning lamp and the STOP warning lamp come on, stop the vehicle and switch off the engine as soon as possible.
Braking
Towing a trailer increases the braking distance. To avoid overheating of the brakes, the use of engine braking is recommended.
Tyres
F Check the tyre pressures of the towing vehicle and of the trailer, observing the recommended pressures.
Lighting
F Check the electrical lighting and signalling on the trailer and the headlamp beam height of your vehicle.
For more information on Adjusting the headlamp beam height, refer to the corresponding section.
6
The rear parking sensors will be deactivated automatically to avoid the audible signal if a genuine PEUGEOT towbar is used.
147
Driving
Starting-switching off the engine, remote control
Put the gear lever into neutral.
Ignition switch
Starting using the key
The parking brake must be applied.
1. Stop position. 2. Ignition on position. 3. Starting position.
148
F With a manual gearbox, place the gear lever in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal.
F Insert the key in the ignition switch. The system recognises the starting code. FUnlock the steering column by
simultaneously turning the steering wheel and the key.
F With an automatic gearbox, place the gear lever at position N or P then press the brake pedal firmly.
In certain circumstances, you may have to apply some force to turn the wheels (if the wheels are against a kerb, for example).
Driving
F With a petrol engine, operate the starter motor by turning the key to position 3 until the engine starts, without pressing the accelerator. Once the engine starts, release the key.
F With a Diesel engine, turn the key to position 2, ignition on, to operate the engine pre-heating system.
F Wait until this warning lamp goes off in the instrument panel, then operate the starter motor by turning the key to position 3 until the engine starts, without pressing the accelerator. Once the engine starts, release the key.
In wintry conditions, the period of illumination of this warning lamp is extended. When the engine is hot, the warning lamp does not come on.
If the engine does not start straight away, switch off the ignition. Wait a few moments before trying again. If the engine does not start after a few attempts, do not keep trying: you risk damaging the starter motor and the engine. Call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
In temperate conditions, do not leave the engine running to warm up, but set off straight away and drive at moderate speed.
Never leave the engine running in an enclosed area without adequate ventilation: internal combustion engines emit toxic exhaust gases, such as carbon monoxide. Danger of intoxication and death. In very severe wintry conditions (temperatures below -23°C), to ensure the correct operation and the durability of the mechanical components of your vehicle, engine and gearbox, it is necessary to leave the engine running for 4 minutes before moving off.
6
149
Driving
Switching off using the key
F Immobilise the vehicle. FTurn the key fully towards you to
position 1 (Stop). F Remove the key from the ignition switch. FTo lock the steering column, turn the
steering wheel until it locks.
To facilitate unlocking of the steering wheel, it is recommended that you place the wheels in the straight ahead position before switching off the engine.
F Check that the parking brake is correctly applied, particularly when parking on a slope.
With a manual parking brake, the lever must be pulled up.
With an electric parking brake, the indicator lamp in the control lever must be on.
Never switch off the ignition until the vehicle has been brought to a complete stop.
150
When leaving the vehicle, remove the key and lock the doors.
Switching off the engine leads to a loss of braking assistance.
Avoid attaching heavy objects to the key or the remote control, which would weigh down on its blade in the ignition switch and could cause a malfunction. It could adversely affect the deployment of the front airbag.
Key left in the "Ignition on" position
If the key has been left in the ignition switch at position 2 (Ignition on), the ignition will be switched off automatically after one hour. To switch the ignition back on, turn the key to position 1 (Stop), then back to position 2 (Ignition on).
Starting and switching off the engine, "Keyless Entry and Starting"
Starting
F Place the electronic key inside the vehicle, in the recognition zone.
F If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, place the gear lever in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal.
For Diesel vehicles, in subzero temperatures the engine will not start until the pre-heater warning lamp has gone off. If this warning lamp comes on after pressing the "START/ STOP" button, press down on the brake or clutch pedal until the warning lamp goes off, without pressing the "START/ STOP" button again, until the engine starts and runs.
F If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, place the selector at position P then press the brake pedal firmly.
F Press the "START/STOP" button.
The steering column unlocks and the engine starts more or less immediately.
(Read the information on Diesel versions).
Driving
The presence in the recognition zone of the electronic key of the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system is essential. For reasons of safety, do not leave this zone while the engine is running. A message is displayed if the electronic key is not detected in the zone. Move the electronic key into the zone to be able to start the engine.
If one of the starting conditions is not met, a reminder message appears in the instrument panel screen. In some circumstances, it is necessary to turn the steering wheel slightly while pressing the "START/STOP" button to assist unlocking of the steering; a message warns you when this is needed.
6
151
Driving
Switching off
F Immobilise the vehicle. F With the electronic key inside the vehicle, press the "START/ STOP" button.
The engine stops and the steering column is locked.
If the vehicle is not immobilised, the engine will not stop.
152
Ignition on (without starting)
Key not detected
Back-up starting
With the Keyless Entry and Starting remote control inside the vehicle, pressing the "START/ STOP" button, with no action on the pedals, allows the ignition to be switched on. This also allows the accessories to be used (for example: audio system, lighting...).
F Press the "START/STOP" button, the instrument panel comes on but the engine does not start.
F Press the button again to switch off the ignition and allow the vehicle to be locked.
When the electronic key is in the recognition zone and your vehicle does not start after pressing the "START/STOP" button: F Insert the electronic key in the reader.
With the ignition on, the system automatically goes into energy economy mode to maintain an adequate state of charge in the battery.
Driving
F If your vehicle has a manual gearbox, place the gear lever in neutral then fully depress the clutch pedal.
Back-up switch off
F If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, place the selector at position P then press the brake pedal firmly.
F Press the "START/STOP" button. The engine starts.
When the electronic key is not detected or is no longer in the recognition zone, a message appears in the instrument panel when you close a door or when you request switching off the engine.
Emergency switch-off
In the event of an emergency only, the engine can be switched off without conditions (even when driving). Press and hold the "START/STOP" button for about five seconds. In this case the steering column locks as soon as the vehicle stops.
6
FTo confirm the request to switch off the engine, press and hold the "START/STOP" button for about five seconds.
In the event of a fault with the electronic key, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Key left in reader
You are warned by a message if the electronic key is is still in the reader on opening the driver's door.
153
Driving
Anti-theft protection
Electronic engine immobiliser
The keys contain an electronic chip which has a secret code. When the ignition is switched on, this code must be recognised in order for starting to be possible. This electronic engine immobiliser locks the engine management system a few minutes after the ignition is switched off and prevents starting of the engine by anyone who does not have the key. In the event of a malfunction, you are informed by a message in the instrument panel screen. In this case, your vehicle does not start; contact a PEUGEOT dealer if required.
Manual parking brake
Application
F With your foot on the brake pedal, pull the parking brake lever up to immobilise your vehicle.
For reasons of safety and theft protection, do not leave your electronic key in the vehicle, even when you are close to it. It is recommended that you keep it on your person.
Release
F With your foot on the brake pedal, pull the parking brake lever up gently, press the release button then lower the lever fully.
When the vehicle is being driven, this warning lamp coming on, accompanied by an audible signal and a message, indicates that the parking brake is still on or has not been fully released.
When parking on a slope, direct your wheels against the kerb, apply the parking brake, engage a gear and switch off the ignition.
Pressing the brake pedal facilitates the application and release of the manual parking brake.
154
Electric parking brake
The driver can take over at any time to apply or release the parking brake, by operating the control lever.
The system allows the application of the parking brake on switching off the engine and release as the vehicle moves off.
- By briefly pulling the control lever to apply the brake,
- By briefly pushing the control lever, while pressing the brake pedal, to release it.
Indicator lamp
This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel and in the control lever to confirm the application of the parking brake.
It goes off to confirm the release of the parking brake.
The indicator lamp in the control lever flashes during manual application or release.
The technology adopted for the electric parking brake does not allow the fitment of 15 inch wheels.
Driving
In the event of a battery failure, the electric parking brake no longer works. As a safety measure, if the parking brake is not applied, immobilise the vehicle by placing a chock against one of the wheels.
With a manual gearbox, you can immobilise the vehicle by engaging a gear. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Never leave a child alone inside the vehicle with the ignition on, as they could release the parking brake.
6
When towing, parking on a steep slope, or if your vehicle is heavily laden, turn the wheels towards the kerb and engage a gear. For towing, your vehicle is approved for parking on slopes of up to 12%.
155
Driving
Automatic release
Ensure first that the engine is running and the driver's door is properly closed. The electric parking brake releases automatically and progressively as the vehicle moves off.
With a manual gearbox: fully depress the clutch pedal, engage first gear or reverse; press the accelerator pedal and release the clutch pedal.
With an automatic gearbox: select position D, M or R then press the accelerator pedal.
The complete release of the parking brake is confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp in the control lever going off, accompanied by the display of a message.
When stationary with the engine running, do not depress the accelerator pedal unnecessarily, you risk releasing the parking brake.
Automatic application
With the vehicle stationary, the parking brake is automatically applied when the ignition is switched off.
Application of of the parking brake is confirmed by illumination of the brake indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp in the control lever, accompanied by the display of a message.
With the engine stalled or in STOP mode of Stop & Start, automatic application does not take place.
With automatic operation, you can manually apply or release the parking brake using the control lever.
156
Driving
Manual release
With the ignition on or the engine running, to release the parking brake: F press the brake pedal, F briefly push the control lever.
The complete release of the parking brake is confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp in the control lever going off, accompanied by the display of a message and an audible signal until the doors are closed.
If you push the control lever without pressing the brake pedal, the parking brake will not be released and a message is displayed.
Manual application
With the vehicle stationary: briefly pull the control lever.
Confirmation of the instruction is signaled by flashing of the indicator lamp in the control lever.
Application of of the parking brake is confirmed by illumination of the brake indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp in the control lever, accompanied by the display of a message.
Recommendations
Label on door panel
Before leaving the vehicle, check that the parking brake is applied: the indicator lamps in the instrument panel and the control lever must be on fixed, not flashing. If the parking brake is not applied, there is an audible signal and a message is displayed on opening the driver's door.
6
The area in front of the electric parking brake control is not intended for the storage of objects.
157
Driving
Immobilising the vehicle with the engine running
To immobilise the vehicle with the engine running, briefly pull the control lever.
Application of the parking brake is confirmed by illumination of the brake indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp in the control lever, accompanied by the display of a message.
Parking the vehicle with the parking brake released
In very cold conditions (risk of freezing), during recovery or in a carwash tunnel, it is recommended that the parking brake not be applied.
To immobilise your vehicle, engage a gear or fit a chock to one of the wheels.
F Switch off the engine. Application of the parking brake is confirmed by illumination of of the indicator lamps in the instrument panel and the control lever. F Switch the ignition on again, without
starting the engine. F Release the parking brake manually by
pushing the control lever while keeping your foot on the brake pedal.
The complete release of the parking brake is confirmed by the brake indicator lamp and the P indicator lamp in the control lever going off, accompanied by the display of a message.
F Switch off the ignition.
158
Driving
Deactivating automatic operation
In some situations, such as very cold weather or towing (caravan, recovery), it may be necessary to deactivate automatic operation of the system. F Start the engine. F Apply the parking brake with the control
lever, if it is released. FTake your foot off the brake pedal. F Push and hold the control lever in the
release direction for at least 10 seconds and no more than 15 seconds. F Release the control lever. F Press and hold the brake pedal. F Pull the control lever in the apply direction for 2 seconds.
From this point, the parking brake can only be applied and released manually using the control lever.
Repeat this procedure to reactivate automatic operation. Reactivation of automatic operation is confirmed by the indicator lamp in the instrument panel going off.
Emergency braking
The emergency braking should only be used in an exceptional situation.
In the event of a failure of the brake pedal or in an exceptional situation (e.g. driver taken ill, under instruction), a continuous pull on the control lever will brake the vehicle. Braking takes place while the control lever is being pulled. It is interrupted if the control lever is released. The ABS and DSC systems provide stability of the vehicle during emergency braking. If the emergency braking malfunctions, the message "Parking brake control faulty" will be displayed.
6
Deactivation of the automatic functions is confirmed by illumination of this indicator lamp in the instrument panel.
F Release the control lever and the brake pedal.
If the ABS and DSC systems malfunction, signalled by the illumination of one or both warning lamps in the instrument panel, then stability of the vehicle is no longer guaranteed. In this event, stability must be assured by the driver by repeating alternate "pull-release" actions on the control lever until the vehicle is immobilised.
159
Driving
Operating faults
The various alert situations are described in this table. In the event of a fault with the electric parking brake it is recommended that you contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
Situation
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and this warning lamp.
Consequences
- Automatic release is not available. - If you attempt an automatic release, a help message is displayed on acceleration
when the parking brake is applied, prompting you to use manual release.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these warning lamps.
- Back-up braking does not have full power. - If automatic release is not available, a help message is displayed on acceleration
when the parking brake is applied, prompting you to use manual release.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these warning lamps.
- Automatic application is not available: use the control lever. -The electric parking brake can only be used manually. - If automatic release is also not available, a help message is displayed on
acceleration when the parking brake is applied, prompting you to use manual release.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these warning lamps.
- If manual application and release do not work, the control lever is faulty. -The automatic functions must be used in all circumstances: they are
automatically reactivated in the event of failure of the control lever. - You can no longer immobilise the vehicle with the engine running.
160
Driving
Situation
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these warning lamps.
Consequences
The parking brake is faulty, the manual and automatic functions may not operate. When stationary, to immobilise your vehicle: F pull and hold the control lever for about 7 to 15 seconds, until the warning lamp
comes on in the instrument panel. If this procedure does not work, you should make your vehicle safe: F park on a level surface, F engage a gear, F if possible, fit a wheel chock. Call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Display of the message "Parking brake fault" and these warning lamps.
Display of the message "Battery fault" and this warning lamp.
-The parking brake does not have its full performance to securely hold the vehicle in all situations.
You should make your vehicle safe: - park on a level surface, - engage a gear, - if possible, fit a wheel chock. Call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. The flashing of the P warning lamps on starting the vehicle indicates that the parking brake is not correctly applied. As soon as possible, stop the vehicle and try to completely release the parking brake, using the control lever, with your foot on the brake pedal.
-The state of charge of the battery is very low and requires immobilisation of the vehicle in a safe place.
- Once the battery is completely discharged, the controls do not operate: to release the parking brake, call on a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
6
161
Driving
Hill start assist
System which keeps your vehicle immobilised temporarily (approximately 2 seconds) when starting on a gradient, the time it takes to move your foot from the brake pedal to the accelerator pedal. It only operates when: - the vehicle is completely stationary, with
your foot on the brake pedal, - particular conditions on a slope are met, - the driver's door is closed. This hill start assist system cannot be deactivated.
Do not leave the vehicle while it is being held in the hill start assist phase. If you need to get out of the vehicle with the engine running, apply the parking brake manually. Then check that the parking brake indicator lamp is on (but not flashing) in the instrument panel.
On an ascending slope, with the vehicle stationary, the vehicle is held momentarily when you release the brake pedal.
With a manual gearbox, if you are in first gear or neutral.
With an automatic gearbox, if you are in position D or M.
On a descending slope, with the vehicle stationary and reverse gear engaged, the vehicle is held momentarily when you release the brake pedal.
Operating fault
If a fault in the system occurs, this warning lamp comes on accompanied by a message. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop to have the system checked.
162
5-speed manual gearbox
Engaging reverse gear
Driving
6-speed manual gearbox
Engaging 5th or 6th gear
Engaging reverse gear
F With the clutch pedal fully down, place the gear lever in neutral.
F Push the gear lever to the right then backwards.
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting of the engine: - always select neutral, - press the clutch pedal.
F Move the lever fully to the right to engage 5th or 6th gear.
Failure to follow this advice may cause permanent damage to the gearbox (engagement of 3rd or 4th gear by mistake).
F Raise the ring under the knob and move the gear lever to the left then forwards.
6
Only engage reverse gear when the vehicle is stationary with the engine at idle.
As a safety precaution and to facilitate starting of the engine: - always select neutral, - press the clutch pedal.
163
Driving
Gear shift indicator
System which reduces fuel consumption by recommending the most suitable gear.
Depending on the driving situation and your vehicle's equipment, the system may advise you to skip one or more gears. You can follow this instruction without going through the intermediate gears.
Example:
T he gear engagement recom mendations must not be considered compulsory. This is because the confi guration of the road, traffic density and safety remai n important factors in the choice of the best gear. The gear shift indicator system does not replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
- You are in third gear.
This function cannot be deactivated.
- You press the accelerator pedal.
164
-The system may suggest that you engage a higher gear.
The information appears in the instrument panel in the form of an arrow. On vehicles with manual gearbox, the arrow may be accompanied by the recommended gear.
The system adapts its gear change recommendation according to the driving conditions (gradient, load, ...) and the demands of the driver (power, acceleration, braking, ...). The system never suggests: - engaging first gear, - engaging reverse gear. - changing down.
Driving
Automatic gearbox
Six speed automatic gearbox which offers a choice between the comfort of fully automatic operation, enhanced by sport and snow programmes, or manual gear changing. Two driving modes are offered: - automatic operation for electronic
management of the gears by the gearbox, with the sport programme for a more
dynamic style of driving or the snow programme to improve
driving when traction is poor - manual operation for sequential changing
of the gears by the driver.
Gear selection gate
Steering mounted controls*
P. Park. - Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake
on or off. - Starting the engine. R. Reverse. - Reversing manoeuvres, vehicle stationary,
engine at idle. N. Neutral. - Immobilisation of the vehicle, parking brake
on. - Starting the engine. D. Automatic operation.
M.+ / - Manual operation Sequential changing of the six gears. F Pull towards the + sign and release to
change up through the gears. or F Push towards the - sign and release to
change down through the gears.
1. "S" (sport) programme switch. 2. "T" (snow) programme switch.
Pull on the right-hand steering mounted control paddle to change up. Pull on the left-hand steering mounted control paddle to change down.
The steering mounted control paddles cannot be used to select neutral or to select or come out of reverse.
* Depending on version.
6
165
Driving
Displays in the instrument panel Moving off
F With your foot on the brake, select position P or N.
When you move the gear selector in the gate to select a position, the corresponding symbol appears in the instrument panel. P. Park R. Reverse N. Neutral D. Drive (automatic operation) S. Sport programme T. Snow programme 1 to 6.Gear engaged during manual operation -. Invalid value during manual operation
F Start the engine. If the conditions are not met, there is an audible signal, accompanied by a message in the instrument panel screen. F With the engine running, press the brake
pedal. F Release the parking brake, unless it is
programmed to automatic mode. F Select position R, D or M. FGradually release the brake pedal. The vehicle moves off.
If position N is engaged inadvertently while driving, allow the engine to return to idle then engage position D to accelerate.
When the engine is running at idle, with the brakes released, if position R, D or M is selected, the vehicle moves even without the accelerator being pressed. When the engine is running, never leave children in the vehicle without supervision. When carrying out maintenance with the engine running, apply the parking brake and select position P.
166
Driving
Automatic operation
F Select position D for automatic changing of the six gears.
The gearbox then operates in auto-adaptive mode, without any intervention on the part of the driver. It continuously selects the most suitable gear according to the style of driving, the profile of the road and the load in the vehicle. For maximum acceleration, without touching the gear selector press the accelerator pedal down fully (kick-down). The gearbox changes down automatically or maintains the gear selected until the maximum engine speed is reached. On braking, the gearbox changes down automatically to provide efficient engine braking. If you release the accelerator sharply, the gearbox will not change to a higher gear for safety reasons.
Never select position N while the vehicle is moving. Never select positions P or R unless the vehicle is completely stationary.
Sport and snow programmes
These two special programmes supplement the automatic operation in very specific conditions of use.
Sport "S"
F Press the "S" switch, after starting the engine. The gearbox automatically favours a dynamic style of driving.
S appears in the instrument panel.
If you vehicle has the Dynamic pack, refer to the corresponding section which supplements sport mode.
Snow "T"
F Press the "T" switch, after starting the engine. The gearbox adapts to driving on slippery roads. This programme improves starting and drive when traction is poor.
T appears in the instrument panel.
Return to automatic operation
F At any time, press the button selected (S or "T") again at any time to quit the programme engaged and return to auto-adaptive mode.
Creep function (moving without using the accelerator)
This function provides great flexibility in manoeuvring the vehicle at low speed (when parking, in traffic jams, ...). With the engine at idle, parking brake released and position D, M or R selected, the vehicle moves as soon as you take your foot off the brake pedal (even without pressing the accelerator). For your safety, this function will be activated only if you press the brake pedal when changing from forward drive to reverse. It is deactivated on opening the driver's door. Closing the door then pressing the brake or accelerator pedal reactivates the function.
Never leave children inside the vehicle without supervision when the engine is running.
6
167
Driving
Manual operation
Operating fault
F Select position M for sequential changing of the six gears.
F Pull towards the + sign and release to change up a gear.
F Push towards the - sign and release to change down a gear.
It is only possible to change from one gear to another if the vehicle speed and engine speed permit; otherwise, the gearbox will operate temporarily in automatic mode.
D disappears and the gears engaged appear in succession in the instrument panel.
If the engine speed is too low or too high, the gear selected flashes for a few seconds, then the actual gear engaged is displayed. It is possible to change from position D (automatic) to position M (manual) at any time. When the vehicle is stationary or moving very slowly, the gearbox selects gear M1 automatically. The sport and snow programmes do not operate in manual mode.
Invalid value during manual operation
This symbol is displayed if a gear is not engaged correctly (gear selector between two positions).
Stopping the vehicle
Before switching off the engine, you can engage position P or N to place the gearbox in neutral. In both cases, apply the parking brake to immobilise the vehicle, unless it is programmed to automatic mode.
If the selector lever is not in position P, when the driver's door is opened or approximately 45 seconds after the ignition is switched off, there is an audible signal and a message appears. F Return the selector lever to
position P; the audible signal stops and the message disappears.
With the ignition on, a message appears in the instrument panel screen to indicate a gearbox fault.
In this case, the gearbox switches to back-up mode and is locked in 3rd gear. You may feel a substantial knock when changing from P to R and from N to R. This will not cause any damage to the gearbox. Do not exceed 62 mph (100 km/h), local speed restrictions permitting. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
You risk damaging the gearbox: - if you press the accelerator and
brake pedals at the same time, - if you force the lever from position P
to another position when the battery is flat.
To reduce fuel consumption when stationary for long periods with the engine running (traffic jam...), position the selector lever at N and apply the parking brake, unless it is programmed in automatic mode.
168
Dynamic pack (Driver Sport Pack)
This pack conditions: - the visual ambience, with specific back-
lighting for the instrument panel, - the acoustic ambience of the engine, - the power assistance for the steering, - the acceleration, - the information to the driver in the
instrument panel on dynamic settings.
Activation
With an automatic gearbox, gear changes are faster.
This function is only available when Park Assist is not selected and snow mode in the automatic gearbox is not selected. If Park Assist is switched on, this automatically deactivates the function.
The telemetry data (longitudinal and lateral acceleration, power produced, turbocharger pressure, ...) are given as an indication only.
F Press and hold the button until the backlighting in the instrument panel changes.
The LED in the button stays on.
If the LED flashes, activation is not possible (for example if Park Assist or snow mode is selected) and so the back-lighting returns to its normal mode. If the LED continues flashing for a long time, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Display
Driving
F Press the end of the wiper control stalk to display in the instrument panel the different information on dynamic settings.
6
F Press repeatedly to go from one screen to another.
169
Driving
Stop & Start
The Stop & Start system puts the engine temporarily into standby - STOP mode - during stops in the traffic (red lights, traffic jams, etc.). The engine restarts automatically - START mode - as soon as you want to move off. The restart takes place instantly, quickly and silently. Perfect for urban use, the Stop & Start system reduces fuel consumption and exhaust emissions as well as the noise level when stationary.
Operation
Going into engine STOP mode
The "ECO" warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and the engine goes into standby automatically:
- With a manual gearbox, with the speed below 12 mph (20 km/h) or with the vehicle stationary (depending on the engine), when you put the gear lever into neutral and release the clutch pedal.
- With an automatic gearbox, vehicle stationary, when you press the brake pedal or place the gear selector lever in position N.
Stop & Start time counter (minutes / seconds or hours / minutes)
A time counter calculates the time spent in STOP mode during a journey.
It resets to zero every time the ignition is switched on.
170
For your comfort, during parking manoeuvres, STOP mode is not available for a few seconds after coming out of reverse gear. The Stop & Start system does not affect the functionality of the vehicle, such as for example, braking, power steering... A slight delay between the vehicle stopping and the engine cutting out may be noticed.
Never refuel with the engine in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition.
Driving
Special cases: STOP mode not available
STOP mode is not invoked principally when: - the vehicle is on a steep slope (up or
down), - the driver's door is open, - the driver's seat belt is not fastened, - the vehicle has not exceeded 6 mph
(10 km/h) since the last engine start by the driver, - the electric parking brake is applied or being applied, - the engine is needed to maintain a comfortable temperature in the passenger compartment, - demisting is active, - some special conditions (battery charge, engine temperature, braking assistance, ambient temperature...) where the engine is needed to assure control of a system.
In this case, the "ECO" warning lamp flashes for a few seconds then goes off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
Going into engine START mode
The "ECO" warning lamp goes off and the engine starts automatically:
- With a manual gearbox, when you fully depress the clutch pedal.
- With an automatic gearbox: gear selector in position D or M, when you release the brake pedal, or gear selector in position N and brake pedal released, when you place the gear selector in position D or M, or when you engage reverse.
Special cases: START invoked automatically
START mode is invoked automatically when: - you open the driver's door, - you unfasten the driver's seat belt, - the speed of the vehicle exceeds 16 mph
(25 km/h) or 2 mph (3 km/h) (depending on the engine) with a manual gearbox, - the speed of the vehicle exceeds 2 mph (3 km/h) with an automatic gearbox, - the electric parking brake is being applied, - some special conditions (battery charge, engine temperature, braking assistance, ambient temperature...) where the engine is needed for control of a system.
6
In this case the "ECO" warning lamp flashes for a few seconds, then goes off.
This operation is perfectly normal.
171
Driving
Deactivation / Reactivation Operating fault
Opening the bonnet
At any time, press the "ECO OFF" switch to deactivate the system. This is confirmed by the switch warning lamp coming on accompanied by a message.
If the system has been deactivated in STOP mode, the engine restarts immediately.
Press the "ECO OFF" switch again. The system is active again; this is confirmed by the switch warning lamp going off, accompanied by a message.
The system is reactivated automatically at every new engine start by the driver.
In the event of a fault with the system, this warning lamp comes on continuously. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. In the event of a fault in STOP mode, the vehicle may stall. All of the instrument panel warning lamps come on. Depending on version, an alert message may also be displayed, asking you to place the gear lever in position N and put your foot on the brake pedal. You must switch off the ignition, then start the engine again.
Before doing anything under the bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid the risk of injury related to an automatic change to START mode.
Driving on flooded roads Before driving through a flooded road, it is strongly recommended that you deactivate the Stop & Start system. For more information on Driving advice, particularly on flooded roads, refer to the corresponding section.
The Stop & Start system requires a 12 V battery of a special specification. All work on this type of battery must be carried out only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. For more information on the 12 V battery, refer to the corresponding section.
172
Driving
Memorising speeds
Touch screen
This function allows speeds to be saved, which can then be offered to set the two systems: the speed limiter (to limit the speed of the vehicle) or the cruise control (for a vehicle cruising speed). You can memorise up to six speed settings for each of the two systems. By default, some speed settings are already memorised.
Memorising
This function is accessible in the touch screen. F Select "Speed settings" in the "Driving assistance" menu.
As a safety measure, the driver must carry out these operations when stationary.
F Select the system for which you want to memorise new speed settings:
speed limiter
or cruise control.
F Press the button corresponding to the speed setting you want to modify.
FEnter the new value using the numerical keypad and confirm.
F Confirm to save the modification and quit the menu.
6
173
Driving
Speed limiter "LIMIT"
System which prevents the vehicle from exceeding the speed programmed by the driver.
Once the programmed speed limit is reached, additional pressure on the accelerator pedal has no effect.
Steering mounted controls
Switching on the speed limiter requires a programmed speed of at least 20 mph (30 km/h). The speed limiter is paused by operation of the control. The programmed speed can be exceeded temporarily by pressing the accelerator firmly beyond the point of resistance. To return to the programmed speed, simply release the accelerator pedal until the vehicle returns to the programmed speed limit.
The programmed speed remains in the memory when the ignition is switched off.
The speed limiter cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can it replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
1. Select speed limiter mode. 2. Decrease programmed speed. 3. Increase programmed speed. 4. Speed limiter on / pause. 5. Display the list of memorised speeds (on
versions with touch screen tablet).
For more information on Memorising speeds, refer to the corresponding section.
Displays in the instrument panel
6. Speed limiter on / pause indication. 7. Speed limiter mode selection indication. 8. Programmed speed setting.
174
Driving
Switching on / Pause
FTurn the thumbwheel 1 to the "LIMIT" position: the speed limiter mode is selected but is not switched on (Pause).
F Switch the speed limiter back on by pressing button 4, if the speed displayed is suitable (by default, the last speed programmed).
F You can temporarily stop the speed limiter by pressing button 4 again: the display confirms that it has been stopped (Pause).
Adjusting the speed limiter setting
You do not have to switch the speed limiter on in order to set the speed. Once the function is selected, you can modify the speed setting by: - using buttons 2 and 3, increasing or
decreasing the speed displayed: F by successive short presses, to modify
by + or - 1 mph (1 km/h), F by a maintained press, to modify in steps
of + or - 5 mph (5 km/h).
- pressing button 5: F the six speeds memorised are displayed in the touch screen, F press the button corresponding to the speed limit chosen. The value is displayed in the instrument panel. The selection screen closes after a few moments.
6
175
Driving
Temporarily exceeding the programmed speed
F Press firmly on the accelerator pedal, going beyond the point of resistance, to exceed the programmed speed limit.
The speed limiter is deactivated temporarily and the displayed programmed speed flashes. An audible signal accompanies the flashing of the programmed speed when exceeding the speed is not due to an action by the driver (steep hill...). As soon as the vehicle's speed returns to the programmed value, the limiter operates again: the display of the programmed speed becomes steady again.
Operating fault
Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the speed limiter. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Switching off
FTurn the wheel 1 to the "0" position. The display of speed limiter information
disappears.
On sharp acceleration, as when descending a steep hill, the speed limiter will not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed. The limiter is temporarily deactivated and the displayed programmed speed flashes. An audible signal accompanies the flashing of the programmed speed when exceeding the speed is not due to an action by the driver. The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT may interfere with the operation of the speed limiter. To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - ensure that the mat is secured
correctly, - do not fit one mat on top of another.
176
Driving
Cruise control "CRUISE"
System which automatically maintains the speed of the vehicle at the value programmed by the driver, without any action on the accelerator pedal.
The cruise control is switched on manually: it requires a minimum vehicle speed of 25 mph (40 km/h).
With a manual gearbox, third or fourth gear (depending on engine) or higher must be engaged.
With an automatic gearbox, second gear or higher must be engaged.
The cruise control is paused manually or by pressing the brake or clutch pedal or on triggering of the ESC system for safety reasons. It is possible to exceed the programmed speed temporarily by pressing the accelerator pedal. To return to the programmed speed, simply release the accelerator pedal until the programmed cruise speed is reached again.
Steering mounted controls
1. Select cruise control mode. 2. Set the current speed as the speed
setting / Decrease the speed setting. 3. Set the current speed as the speed
setting / Increase the speed setting. 4. Pause / resume cruise control. 5. Display the list of memorised speeds.
Displays in the instrument panel
6. Cruise control pause / resume indication. 7. Cruise control mode selection indication. 8. Programmed speed setting.
Switching off the ignition cancels any programmed speed value.
6
The cruise control system cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need to observe speed limits, nor can it replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. You are advised to keep your feet near the pedals at all times.
For more information on Memorising speeds, refer to the corresponding section.
177
Driving
Switching on / Pause
FTurn wheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position: the cruise control mode is selected but is not switched on (Pause).
F Press button 2 or 3: your vehicle's current speed becomes the cruise speed.
The cruise control is activated (ON).
Modification of the cruise speed setting
If the cruise control is switched on, you can then modify the cruise speed in one of the following ways: - using buttons 2 or 3:
F by successive short presses, to modify the speed by + or - 1 mph (km/h),
F by a long press, to modify the speed in steps of + or - 5 mph (km/h),
Once switched on, you can pause the cruise control at any time by pressing button 4: the screen confirms the pause.
Exceeding the programmed speed
If the programmed speed is exceeded, the displayed speed flashes. Once the vehicle returns to the programmed speed, the display becomes steady again.
Switching off
FTurn wheel 1 to the "0" position. The display of information related to the
cruise control disappears.
- pressing button 5: F the six memorised speeds are displayed in the the touch screen, F choose a value: it is displayed in the instrument panel. The selection screen closes after a few moments. The modification is then accepted.
178
Operating fault
Flashing of the dashes indicates a fault with the cruise control. Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
When the cruise control is switched on, be careful if you maintain the pressure on one of the programmed speed changing buttons: this may result in a very rapid change in the speed of your vehicle. Do not use the cruise control on slippery roads or in heavy traffic. On a steep descent, the cruise control will not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed. On steep climbs or when towing, the programmed speed may not be reached or maintained. The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT may interfere with the operation of the cruise control. To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - ensure that the mat is secured
correctly, - never fit one mat on top of another.
Driving
6
179
Driving
Dynamic cruise control "CRUISE"
This systems allows the vehicle's speed to be maintained at a value set by the driver. In addition it allows (when circumstances permit) an inter-vehicle time that you have selected to be maintained between your vehicle and the one in front.
Switching between the types of cruise control
If you want to use the "standard" cruise control, it is possible to deactivate the dynamic cruise control in the touch screen. The cruise control selection thumbwheel must be in the "CRUISE" position, otherwise the choice will not be taken into account.
F Press the button to change from dynamic cruise control to "standard" cruise control and vice-versa.
For more information on the Cruise control, refer to the corresponding section.
Principles of operation
Using a radar with a range of about 100 metres, located at the front of the vehicle, this system detects a vehicle running in front of your vehicle. It automatically adapts the speed of your vehicle to that of the vehicle in front. If the vehicle in front is running more slowly, the system progressively reduces the speed of your vehicle using just engine braking (as if the driver had pressed the "-" button). If your vehicle is too close to, or approaching too quickly the vehicle in front, the dynamic cruise control is automatically deactivated. The driver is then alerted by an audible signal, accompanied by a message. If the vehicle in front accelerates or changes lane, the dynamic cruise control progressively accelerates your vehicle to return to the programmed speed. If the driver operates a direction indicator to overtake a slower vehicle, the dynamic cruise control allows your vehicle to temporarily approach the vehicle in front to assist the overtaking manoeuvre, though never exceeding the programmed speed.
The state of the system is memorised on switching off the ignition.
180
The dynamic cruise control operates by day and at night, in fog or moderate rainfall.
The selection of this system deactivates the display of inter-vehicle time.
The system does not act on the braking system, but works only with engine braking. The regulation range is limited: there will no longer be any adjustment of speed if the difference between the programmed speed setting and the speed of the vehicle in front becomes too great.
If the difference between the programmed speed setting and the speed of the vehicle in front is too great, the speed cannot be adjusted: the cruise control is automatically deactivated.
Driving
General points
The dynamic cruise control is switched on manually, it requires that the speed of the vehicle be between 25 mph (40 km/h) and 90 mph (150 km/h).
With a manual gearbox, third or fourth gear (depending on engine) or higher must be engaged.
With an automatic gearbox, second gear or higher must be engaged.
If the cruise speed setting is above 90 mph (150 km/h), the dynamic cruise control switches to normal cruise control mode (without automatic adjustment of the safety inter-vehicle distance).
The dynamic cruise control cannot in any circumstances replace the observation of speed limits, nor the need for the vigilance on the part of the driver. It is recommended that you always keep your feet close to the pedals.
The dynamic cruise control can be paused manually with the control, or automatically: - by pressing the brake or clutch pedal, - in the event of operation of the ESC, for
safety reasons, - in the event of an action on the electric
parking brake control, - when an inter-vehicle time threshold is
reached (calculated according to the relative speeds of your vehicle and the vehicle in front and the inter-vehicle time setting chosen), - when the distance between your vehicle and the one in front becomes too small, - when the speed of the vehicle in front is too low, - when the speed of your vehicle becomes too low.
The inter-vehicle time setting is memorised when switching off the ignition.
Steering mounted controls
1. Select cruise control mode. 2. Set the current speed as the cruise speed
setting / Reduce the cruise speed setting. 3. Set the current speed as the cruise speed
setting / Increase the cruise speed setting. 4. Pause / resume cruise control. 5. Display the list of memorised speeds and
adjust the inter-vehicle time.
6
For more information on Memorising speeds, refer to the corresponding section.
181
Driving
Displays in the instrument panel
6. Indication of cruise control pause / resume. 7. Indication of selection of cruise control mode,
or vehicle speed adjustment phase. 8. Programmed speed setting.
Switching on
The dynamic cruise control must be selected in the "Driving assistance" menu. FTurn the wheel 1 to the "CRUISE" position:
cruise control mode is selected, but not started (Pause). F Press one of the buttons 2 or 3: the current speed of your vehicle becomes the cruise speed setting. The cruise control is activated (ON). By default, the inter-vehicle time is set at 2 seconds. Otherwise, the last setting made will be used when switching on the system.
Modification of the cruise speed
Buttons 2 and 3
If the cruise control is on, you can modify the speed: F by successive short presses, to modify in
steps of + or - 1 mph (km/h), F by a maintained press, to modify in steps
of + or - 5 mph (km/h).
As a precaution, it is recommended that you select a cruise speed setting close to the current speed of your vehicle.
182
Driving
Modification of the cruise control speed and/or the inter-vehicle time
Button 5 (MEM)
This setting remains memorised, whatever the state of the system. The selection screen closes after a few moments. The modifications are then accepted.
Press button 5, the six memorised speeds and the inter-vehicle time setting are displayed in the touch screen. F Choose a speed setting: it is displayed in
the instrument panel, F press or the "+" or "-" button to choose
a new inter-vehicle time setting between 2.5 seconds and 1 second.
In the event of the presence of a vehicle detected by the radar, if the speed selected is much higher than the speed of that vehicle, the system is not activated and the alert message "Activation not possible, conditions unsuitable" is displayed until driving conditions are safe to allow activation of the system.
Exceeding the programmed speed
It is possible to exceed the programmed speed temporarily by depressing the accelerator pedal. Simply release the accelerator pedal to return to the programmed speed. If the programmed setting is unintentionally exceeded, descending a steep hill for example, the speed setting in the instrument panel flashes as a warning.
6
183
Driving
Driving situations and associated alerts
The following table describes the alerts and the messages displayed for the different driving situations. The display of these alerts is not sequential.
Symbol
Display in the instrument panel
Associated message
Comments
No vehicle detected: the system operates as a standard cruise control.
Detection of a vehicle, at the limit of the range of the radar: the system operates as a standard cruise control.
"SPEED ADJUSTED"
Detection of a vehicle that is too close or running at a speed lower than your vehicle's cruise speed setting. The system uses engine braking to slow your vehicle (within a limit of 20 mph (30 km/h)) and then hold it at the speed of the vehicle in front so as to observe the programmed inter-vehicle time. When automatically slowing down behind a vehicle, your true speed may be higher than the "adjusted speed" displayed.
"SPEED ADJUSTED"
When the adjusted speed reaches the limit of regulation (speed setting less than 20 mph (30 km/h)), the adjusted speed flashes together with the speed setting to signal that automatic deactivation of the system is imminent.
"Cruise control paused".
If the system exceeds the limit of speed adjustment possible by the system and in the absence of any reaction by the driver (operation of the direction indicator, change of lane, reduction of the speed of the vehicle), the system is automatically paused. The display of the deactivation message is accompanied by an audible signal.
184
Driving
When the dynamic cruise control is automatically paused, it can only be reactivated when safe conditions are restored. The message "Activation not possible, conditions unsuitable" is displayed while reactivation is not possible. When the conditions allow, it is recommended that the function be reactivated by pressing button 2 (SET+) or 3 (SET-), which will make the current speed of your vehicle the new cruise speed setting, rather than by pressing button 4 (on/pause) which reactivates the cruise control using the old cruise speed setting, which may be very different from the current speed of your vehicle.
Limits of operation
The speed regulation range is limited to a maximum difference of 20 mph (30 km/h) between the speed setting and the speed of the vehicle in front. Above this, the system goes into pause if the safe distance becomes too low. The dynamic cruise control uses only engine braking to slow the vehicle. Consequently the vehicle loses speed slowly, as when releasing the accelerator pedal. The system is paused automatically: - if the vehicle in front slows down too much
or too suddenly, and the driver does not brake, - if a vehicle comes between your vehicle and the vehicle in front, - if the system does not slow the vehicle enough to continue to maintain a safe distance, for example when descending a steep hill.
As the radar's field of view is quite narrow, it is possible that the system may not detect:
- vehicles not running in the middle of the lane,
- vehicles entering a corner, - vehicles changing lane at the last moment.
The cruise control does not take account of: - stationary vehicles, - vehicles driving in the opposite
direction.
6
- vehicles of reduced width, such as motorcycles,
185
Driving
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with the dynamic cruise control, you are alerted by an audible signal and display of the message message "Driving aid functions fault". Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
When the cruise control is working, take care if making a maintained press on one of the cruise control programmed speed modification buttons: this can lead to a very quick change in the speed of your vehicle. Do not use the dynamic cruise control on slippery surfaces or in heavy traffic. When descending a steep hill, the cruise control may not be able to prevent the vehicle from exceeding the programmed speed. When ascending a steep hill or when towing, it might not be possible to attain or maintain the programmed speed.
The operation of the radar, located in the front bumper, may be disturbed in certain weather conditions, for example: with accumulations of snow, ice, mud, ... Clean the front bumper, removing the snow, mud, ...
186
The use of mats not approved by PEUGEOT may interfere with the operation of the dynamic cruise control. To avoid any risk of jamming the pedals: - ensure that mats are secured
correctly, - never fit one mat on top of another.
Driving
Display of inter-vehicle time
Using a radar located at the front of the vehicle, this system helps the driver maintain a safe distance between their vehicle and the one in front, by displaying the current inter-vehicle time in the instrument panel. This is the time interval, expressed in seconds, that separates two vehicles in line. The recommended safe value is about 2 seconds. Refer to the legislation or highway code in force in your country.
The system is active in a speed range between 42 and 93 mph (70 and 150 km/h). Stationary vehicles and certain other road users (such as bicycles for example) are not detected. The system displays inter-vehicle time values of between 3 seconds and 0.5 of a second. Below 0.5 of a second, the value displayed is maintained at this level, even if the true inter-vehicle time is less.
The measurement is displayed for information only: the system takes no action on the vehicle. This system does not in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver, who must remain in control of the vehicle at all times. The system is not designed for urban use nor for more dynamic driving (bends, acceleration, harsh braking...) but rather when driving at a steady speed.
Activation / deactivation*
Activation of the system is done in the "Driving assistance" menu, with the engine running.
F Press this button, the indicator lamp comes on.
The state of the system is memorised when the ignition is switched off.
Conditions for display
The dynamic cruise control must not be selected (the dynamic cruise control information is displayed instead of that for the inter-vehicle time).
6
* Depending on version. 187
Driving
Displays
Once the speed conditions are met, a symbol is displayed in the instrument panel.
Symbol
Associated message
Comments No vehicle detected by the radar.
A vehicle is detected but the inter-vehicle time is more than 3 seconds. No value is displayed.
A vehicle is detected. The inter-vehicle time is 3 seconds or less. The minimum value displayed is 0.5 seconds, even if the true inter-vehicle time is lower.
"SYSTEM INACTIVE: Speed unsuitable"
If the speed of your vehicle is outside the operating range. Where the speed is not suitable, a message is displayed while the speed is outside limits (below 42 mph (70 km/h) or above 93 mph (150 km/h), approximately). However, when decelerating, the system is deactivated below 27 mph (45 km/h).
"SYSTEM INACTIVE: Visibility The system switches to standby automatically if the sensor does not detect the vehicle in
reduced"
front correctly (very difficult weather conditions, sensor out of adjustment, ...).
188
Operating limits
The vehicle being followed may not be detected in certain conditions such as, for example: - when turning, - when changing lane, - when the vehicle in front is out of the range
of the sensor (maximum range: around 100 m).
Operating fault
In the event of a fault with the system, this warning lamp is displayed accompanied by a message. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
At the first use of the system after repair, a message may be displayed indicating that the system is initialising. The system is not available while this is in progress. As soon as the message disappears the system is operational again. If the message does not disappear, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
The operation of the radar, located in the front bumper, may be disturbed in certain weather conditions, for example: with accumulations of snow, ice, mud, ... Clean the front bumper, removing the snow, mud, ...
Driving
6
189
Driving
Emergency collision alert system and emergency collision braking system
Emergency collision alert
System providing a warning to the driver that their vehicle is at risk of collision with the vehicle in front.
This system operates from 20 mph (30 km/h), only when other vehicles are running in the same direction as your vehicle; the system does not detect stationary objects. A radar is fitted at the front of the vehicle.
This system has been designed to improve driving safety. The driver must constantly monitor the traffic conditions, to assess the distance and relative speed of other vehicles. The collision risk alert system does not replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
The emergency collision alert system can be activated or deactivated by the driver. From the secondary page of the "Driving assistance" menu: F Select the "Vehicle settings" menu. F Check the "Collision risk alert and auto
braking" line and confirm.
190
Driving
Setting the thresholds for the alert
The alert thresholds determine how you want to be alerted to the presence of a vehicle running in front of you. You can choose from three thresholds: - "Distant", to be given an early alert
(cautious driving). - "Normal". - "Close", to be given a later alert (sporty
driving).
From the secondary page of the "Driving assistance" menu: F Select the "Vehicle settings" menu. F Check the "Collision risk alert and auto
braking" line.
F Modify the alert threshold and press on "Finish" to memorise the threshold and leave the menu.
F Press on "Confirm" to save the change.
6
F Press on the magnifying glass.
191
Driving
Alerts
According to the collision risk detected by the system and the alert threshold chosen, different levels of alert can be given.
Level 1: visual alert only (orange) indicating that the vehicle in front is very close. The message "Vehicle close" is displayed.
This level of alert is based on the inter-vehicle time between your vehicle and the one in front.
Level 2: visual (red) and audible alerts indicating that a collision is imminent. The message "Brake!" is displayed.
This level of alert is based on a time before collision. It takes account of the vehicle dynamics, the speed of your vehicle and the speed of the vehicle in front, the driving conditions, the situation with your vehicle (cornering, pedals pressed, etc.) to trigger the alert at the right moment.
192
The emergency collision alert system does not replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
The change from one level of alert to the next takes place if the driving conditions do not change (speed unchanged, no change of lane...)
If the speed of your vehicle is too high when approaching another vehicle, the first level of alert may not be displayed: the level 2 alert may be displayed directly. On the other hand, the level 1 alert is never displayed with the "close" triggering threshold 3. Severe weather conditions (very heavy rain, accumulations of snow in front of the radar) may interfere with the operation of the system, resulting in the display of this message "SYSTEM INACTIVE: Reduced visibility". The system will remain unavailable until the message disappears.
Emergency collision braking system
Driving
Emergency collision braking is a system that aims to reduce the speed of a frontal collision if the driver does not take action, using radar type detection and acting on the vehicle's braking system.
Conditions for activation
Emergency collision braking only operates in the following conditions: engine running no fault in the electronic stability system, speed at least 12 mph (20 km/h), engine speed sufficiently high. On the other hand, the radar type of detection cannot act on the braking system in a tight corner.
From the secondary page of the "Driving assistance" menu: F Select the "Vehicle settings" menu. F Check the "Collision risk alert and auto
braking" line.
F Press the magnifying glass.
F Modify the alert threshold and check the "Auto braking" line.
F Press on "Finish" to memorise the threshold and leave the menu.
F Press on "Confirm" to save the change.
6
This warning lamp flashes when your vehicle "starts" to brake but will not in any circumstance completely stop the vehicle.
You should continue to press firmly on the brake pedal until the vehicle comes to a complete stop.
When the emergency collision braking system is not activated, this warning lamp is on fixed.
193
Driving
Operating fault
In the event of a fault, you are alerted by the display of the Service warning lamp, accompanied by a message. Consult a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
The operation of the radar, located in the front bumper, may be disturbed in certain weather conditions, for example: with accumulations of snow, ice, mud, ... Clean the front bumper, removing the snow, mud, ...
194
Blind spot monitoring system
This driving assistance system warns the driver of the presence of another vehicle in the blind spot angle of their vehicle (areas hidden from the driver's field of vision), as soon as this presents a potential danger.
A warning lamp appears in the door mirror on the side in question: - immediately, when being overtaken, - after a delay of about one second, when
overtaking a vehicle slowly.
Driving
Operation
Activation of the system is done in the "Driving assistance" menu of the touch screen.
F Press this button (depending on version) to activate the system; the associated indicator lamp comes on.
This indicator lamp comes on in the instrument panel.
Sensors fitted in the front and rear bumpers monitor the blind spots.
6
This system is designed to improve safety when driving and is in no circumstances a substitute for the use of the interior rear view mirror and door mirrors. It is the driver's responsibility to constantly check the traffic, to assess the distances and relative speeds of other vehicles and to predict their movements before deciding whether to change lane. The blind spot monitoring system does not replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
195
Driving
The alert is given by a warning lamp which comes on in the door mirror on the side in question as soon as a vehicle - car, lorry, bicycle - is detected and the following conditions are fulfilled: - all the vehicles are moving in the same
direction and on adjacent lanes, - the speed of your vehicle is between 7 and
87 mph (12 and 140 km/h), - when you overtake a vehicle with a speed
difference of less than 6 mph (10 km/h), - when a vehicle overtakes you with a speed
difference of less than 16 mph (25 km/h), - the traffic is flowing normally, - in the case of an overtaking manoeuvre,
if this is prolonged and the vehicle being overtaken remains in the blind spot, - you are driving on a straight or slightly curved road, - your vehicle is not pulling a trailer, a caravan...
No alert will be given in the following situations: - in the presence of immobile objects
(parked vehicles, barriers, street lamps, road signs...), - with vehicles moving in the opposite direction, - driving on a winding road or a sharp corner,
- when overtaking (or being overtaken by) a very long vehicle (lorry, coach...) which is at the same time detected at the rear in the blind spot angle and present in the driver's forward field of vision,
- in very heavy traffic: vehicles detected in front and behind are confused with a lorry or an immobile object,
- when overtaking quickly.
196
Driving
Operating fault
F To deactivate the system, press this button again; its indicator lamp goes off as well as the associated indicator in the instrument panel (depending on version).
The state of the system remains in memory on switching off the ignition.
The system is automatically deactivated when towing with a towbar approved by PEUGEOT.
Depending on version: - this warning lamp flashes for a few seconds then goes off,
- this symbol changes to alert mode, its warning lamp flashes for a few moments, then goes off.
Have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
The system may suffer temporary interference in certain weather conditions (rain, hail...). In particular, driving on a wet surface or moving from a dry area to a wet area can cause false alerts (for example, the presence of a fog of water droplets in the blind spot angle is interpreted as a vehicle). In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the sensors are not covered by mud, ice or snow. Take care not to cover the warning zone in the door mirrors or the detection zones on the front and rear bumpers with adhesive labels or other objects; they may hamper the correct operation of the system.
6
High pressure jet wash When washing your vehicle, direct the lance at least 30 cm away from the sensors.
197
Driving
Parking sensors
Rear parking sensors
Visual assistance
The system is switched on by engaging reverse gear. This is confirmed by an audible signal. The system is switched off when you come out of reverse gear.
This system indicates the proximity of an obstacle (e.g. pedestrian, vehicle, tree, gate) which comes within the field of detection of sensors located in the bumper. Certain types of obstacle (e.g. stake, roadworks cone) detected initially will no longer be detected at the end of the manoeuvre, if they are located in blind spots in the sensors' field of detection.
This system cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
Audible assistance
The proximity information is given by an intermittent audible signal, the frequency of which increases as the vehicle approaches the obstacle. The sound emitted by the speaker (right-hand or left-hand) indicates the side on which the obstacle is located. When the distance between the vehicle and the obstacle becomes less than approximately thirty centimetres, the audible signal becomes continuous.
This supplements the audible signal by displaying bars in the screen or the instrument panel which move progressively nearer to the vehicle. When the obstacle is near, the "Danger" symbol is displayed.
Front parking sensors
As an addition to the rear parking sensors, the front parking sensors are triggered when an obstacle is detected in front and the speed of the vehicle is still below 6 mph (10 km/h). The front parking sensors are interrupted if the vehicle stops for more than three seconds in forward gear, if no further obstacles are detected or when the speed of the vehicle exceeds 6 mph (10 km/h).
The sound from the speakers (front or rear) indicates whether the obstacle is in front or behind.
198
Driving
Deactivation / Activation of the front and rear parking sensors
The system is deactivated in the "Driving assistance" menu of the touch screen.
F Press this button. The indicator lamp in the button comes on.
Pressing this button again reactivates the function. The indicator lamp in the button goes off.
The system will be deactivated automatically if a trailer is being towed or a bicycle carrier is fitted on a towbar (vehicle fitted with a towbar installed in line with the manufacturer's recommendations).
Operating fault
Depending on version and when engaging reverse:
- this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and/or a message appears, accompanied by an audible signal,
- this symbol changes to alert mode, its warning lamp flashes for a few moments then stays on and a message appears, accompanied by an audible signal.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
The parking sensors are deactivated while the Park Assist system is measuring a space. For more information on Park Assist, refer to the corresponding section.
In bad or wintry weather, ensure that the sensors are not covered with mud, ice or snow. When reverse gear is engaged, an audible signal (long beep) indicates that the sensors may be dirty. Certain sound sources (motorcycle, lorry, pneumatic drill, etc.) may trigger the audible signals of the parking sensor system.
High pressure jet wash When washing your vehicle, do not direct the lance within 30 cm of the sensors.
6
199
Driving
Reversing camera
The reversing camera is activated automatically when reverse gear is engaged. Depending on version, the image is displayed in the touch screen or the instrument panel. The reversing camera function may be completed with parking sensors.
The reversing camera cannot in any circumstances replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver.
High pressure jet washing When washing your vehicle, do not direct the lance within 30 cm of the camera lens.
The superimposed representation of guide lines helps with the manoeuvre. They are represented by lines marked "on the ground" and do not allow the position of the vehicle to be determined relative to tall obstacles (for example: other vehicles, ...). Some deformation of the image is normal. It is normal to be able to see part of the number plate at the bottom of the screen.
The blue lines represent the general direction of the vehicle (the difference corresponds to the width of your vehicle without the mirrors). The red lines represent a distance of about 30 cm beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear bumper. The green lines represent distances of about 1 and 2 metres beyond the edge of your vehicle's rear bumper. The turquoise blue curves represent the maximum turning circle.
Opening the tailgate causes the display to disappear.
Clean the reversing camera regularly using a soft, dry cloth.
200
Park Assist
This system provides active assistance with parking. It detects a parking space then operates the steering to park in the space. It operates the steering while the driver manages the accelerator, brakes, gears and clutch (manual gearbox). During phases of entry into and exit from a parking space, the system provides visual and audible information to the driver in order to make the manoeuvres safe. It may be necessary to move forwards and backwards more than once.
The Park Assist system provides assistance for the following manoeuvres:
A.Entry into a parallel parking space
The driver can take control at any time by gripping the steering wheel.
This manoeuvring assistance system cannot, in any circumstances, replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. The driver must remain in control of their vehicle ensuring that the space remains clear throughout the manoeuvre. In some circumstances, the sensors may not detect small obstacles located in their blind spots.
B.Exit from a parallel parking space
The Park Assist system cannot work with the engine off.
C. Bay parking
Driving
During a manoeuvre, the steering wheel turns quickly: do not hold the steering wheel, do not place your hands between the spokes of the steering wheel and take care with loose and bulky clothing (scarves, ties, handbags...) - Risk of injury!
When Park Assist is activated, it prevents a change to STOP mode of Stop & Start. In STOP mode, activation of Park Assist restarts the engine.
The Park Assist system takes control of the power steering for a maximum of 4 manoeuvre cycles. The function is deactivated after these 4 cycles. If you think that your vehicle is not positioned correctly, you should then take control of the steering to carry out the manoeuvre.
6
201
Driving
The sequence of manoeuvres and the driving instructions are displayed in the instrument panel.
The assistance is activated: the display of this symbol and a speed limit indicate that the steering manoeuvres are controlled by the system: do not touch the steering wheel.
The assistance is deactivated: the display of this symbol indicates that the steering manoeuvres are no longer controlled by the system: you must take control of the steering.
The parking sensors function is not available during parking space measurement. It intervenes later when manoeuvring to warn you that your vehicle is approaching an obstacle: the audible signal becomes continuous when the obstacle is less than thirty centimetres away. If you have deactivated the parking sensors, they are automatically reactivated during assisted parking manoeuvres.
Activation of Park Assist deactivates the Blind Spot Monitoring System.
You should always check the surroundings of your vehicle before starting a manoeuvre.
202
Operation
Assistance with parallel parking manoeuvres
Driving
F When you have identified a parking space:
F Press this control.
or F Select "Park Assist" in the "Driving assistance" menu of the touch screen to activate the function.
F Limit the speed of the vehicle to a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h) and select "Enter parking slot" in the touch screen.
To enter a parking space, the system does not identify spaces that are clearly smaller or larger than the vehicle.
F Operate the direction indicator on the parking side chosen to activate the measurement function. You should drive at a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from the row of parked vehicles.
6
F Drive slowly following the instructions until the system finds a free space.
203
Driving
F Move forwards slowly until a message is displayed, accompanied by an audible signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.
FThe assisted parking manoeuvre is in progress. Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), move forwards and backwards, aided by the warnings from the "Parking sensors" system, until the indication of the end of the manoeuvre.
F At the end of the manoeuvre, the operating indicator lamp goes out in the instrument panel, accompanied by a message and an audible signal.
The assistance is deactivated: you can take over control.
F Select reverse, release the steering wheel and start moving without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h).
204
Assistance in exiting from a parallel parking space
Driving
F When you want to leave a parallel parking space, start the engine.
F Operate the direction indicator for the exit side chosen.
FEngage reverse or forward gear and release the steering wheel.
F With the vehicle stationary, press this control.
or
F Select "Park Assist" in the "Driving assistance" menu of
the touch screen to activate the function.
FThe assisted parking manoeuvre is in progress. Without exceeding 3 mph
F Press on "Exit parking slot" in the touch screen.
(5 km/h), move forwards and backwards, aided by the warnings from the "Parking sensors" system, until the indication of the
end of the manoeuvre.
The manoeuvre is complete when the vehicle's front wheels are clear of the parking space. At the end of the manoeuvre, the indicator lamp in the instrument panel goes off, accompanied by a message and an audible signal. The assistance is deactivated: you can take over control.
6
205
Driving
Assistance with bay parking manoeuvres
When several successive bays are found, the vehicle will be directed towards the last one.
F Once you have identified a parking zone, press this control at the steering wheel.
F Operate the direction indicator on the parking side chosen to activate the measurement function. You should drive at a distance of between 0.5 m and 1.5 m from the row of parked vehicles.
or
F Select "Park Assist" in the "Driving assistance" menu of the touch screen to activate the function.
F Limit the speed of the vehicle to a maximum of 12 mph (20 km/h) and select "Start parking in a bay" on the touch screen.
F Drive slowly following the instructions until the system finds a free space.
F Move forwards slowly until a message is displayed, accompanied by an audible signal, asking you to engage reverse gear.
206
Driving
During a bay parking manoeuvre, the Park Assist system is automatically deactivated once the rear of the vehicle is within 50 cm of an obstacle.
F Select reverse, release the steering wheel and start moving without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h).
At the end of the manoeuvre, the operating indicator lamp goes off in the instrument panel, accompanied by a message and an audible signal. The assistance is deactivated: you can take over control.
During parking and exit from parking manoeuvres, the reversing camera function may come into operation. It facilitates monitoring of the surroundings of the vehicle, by displaying additional information in the instrument panel. For more information on the Reversing camera, refer to the corresponding section.
6
FThe assisted parking manoeuvre is in progress. Without exceeding 4 mph (7 km/h), follow the instructions displayed in the instrument panel, aided by the warnings from the "Parking sensors" system, until the indication of the end of the manoeuvre.
207
Driving
Deactivation
The system is deactivated by pressing the control. The system is deactivated automatically: - on switching off the ignition, - if the engine stalls, - if no manoeuvre is started within 5 minutes
of selection of the type of manoeuvre, - after a prolonged stop of the vehicle during
a manoeuvre, - if the road wheel anti-slip regulation (ASR)
is triggered, - if the speed of the vehicle exceeds the
stated limit, - when the driver interrupts movement of the
steering wheel, - after 4 manoeuvre cycles, - on opening the driver's door, - if one of the front wheels encounters an
obstacle. The operation indicator lamp goes off in the instrument panel and a message is displayed accompanied by an audible signal. The driver should then take back control of the vehicle's steering.
If the system is deactivated during a manoeuvre, the drive should reactivate it to repeat the measurement.
Switching off
The system is switched off automatically: - when towing a trailer, - if the driver's door is opened, - if the speed of the vehicle is above 42 mph
(70 km/h). To switch the system of for a prolonged period, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
In the event of a fault, the symbol for the button changes to alert mode and the warning lamp flashes for a few moments then goes off.
Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Operating faults
Depending on version: - this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel and a message appears, accompanied by an audible signal,
- this symbol changes to alert mode, its warning lamp flashes for a few moments, then goes off.
If the lateral distance between your vehicle and the space is too great, the system may not be able to measure the space. Anything projecting beyond the envelope of the vehicle (long or wide load) is not taken into account by the Park Assist system during a manoeuvre.
In bad weather or in winter, ensure that the sensors are not covered by road dirt, ice or snow. In the event of a fault, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
208
Under-inflation detection
System which automatically checks the pressures of the tyres while driving.
The system monitors the pressures in the four tyres, once the vehicle is moving. It compares the information given by the four wheel speed sensors with reference values, which must be reinitialised every time the tyre pressures are adjusted or a wheel changed. The system triggers an alert as soon as it detects a drop in the inflation pressure of one or more tyres.
The under-inflation detection system does not replace the need for vigilance on the part of the driver. This system does not avoid the need to check the tyre pressures (including the spare wheel) every month as well as before a long journey. Driving with under-inflated tyres impairs road holding, extends braking distances and causes premature tyre wear, particularly under arduous conditions (high loading, high speed, long journey).
Driving with under-inflated tyres increases fuel consumption.
Driving
The inflation pressures defined for your vehicle can be found on the tyre pressure label. For more information on the Identification markings, refer to the corresponding section. Tyre pressures should be checked when the tyres are "cold" (vehicle stopped for 1 hour or after a journey of less than 6 miles (10 km) at moderate speeds). Otherwise (when hot), add 0.3 bar to the pressures shown on the label.
6
Snow chains
The system does not have to be reinitialised after fitting or removing snow chains.
209
Driving
Under-inflation alert
This is given by fixed illumination of this warning lamp, accompanied by an audible signal and, depending on equipment, the display of a message.
F Reduce speed immediately, avoid excessive steering movements and sudden braking.
F Stop the vehicle as soon as it is safe to do so.
The loss of pressure detected does not always cause visible bulging of the tyre. Do not satisfy yourself with just a visual check.
F In the event of a puncture, use the temporary puncture repair kit or the spare wheel (depending on equipment),
or F if you have a compressor, such as the one
in the temporary puncture repair kit, check the pressures of the four tyres when cold, or F if it is not possible to make this check immediately, drive carefully at reduced speed.
The alert is maintained until the system is reinitialised.
Reinitialisation
It is necessary to reinitialise the system every time one or more tyre pressures are adjusted, and after changing one or more wheels.
Before reinitialising the system, ensure that the pressures of the four tyres are correct for the use of the vehicle and in line with the recommendations on the tyre pressure label. The under-inflation alert can only be relied on if the reinitialisation of the system has been done with the pressures in the four tyres correctly adjusted. The under-inflation detection system does not give a warning if a pressure is incorrect at the time of reinitialisation.
210
Touch screen
Screen C
Driving
F Press the "5" or "6" button to select the Define the vehicle parameters menu, then confirm by pressing the OK button.
Reinitialisation of the system is done with the ignition on and the vehicle stationary.
F Select "Under-inflation initialisation" in the "Driving assistance" menu of the touch screen.
F Confirm the instruction by pressing "Yes", an audible signal and a message confirm the reinitialisation.
The new pressure settings registered are considered to be reference values by the system.
F Press the MENUbutton for access to the main menu.
F Press the "7" or "8" buttons to select the Personalisation-configuration menu, then confirm by pressing the OK button.
F Press the "5" or "6" button to select the Driving assistance menu, then the Tyre pressures menu, then the Reinitialisation menu, then confirming by pressing the OK button. An audible signal confirms the reinitialisation.
6
211
Driving
Screen A
Operating fault
Screen A (without audio system)
F With the ignition on and the vehicle stationary, press this button for about 3 seconds then release it, an audible signal confirms the reinitialisation.
The flashing and then fixed illumination of the under-inflation warning lamp accompanied by illumination of the Service warning lamp indicates a fault with the system. A message appears, accompanied by an audible signal.
In this case, under-inflation monitoring of the tyres is no longer assured. Have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Before doing anything to the system, the pressures of the four tyres must be checked and the system reinitialised.
212
Fuel tank
Capacity of the tank: approximately 53 litres (or 45 litres according to version).
Opening
Refuelling
Additions of fuel must be of at least 6 litres to be registered by the fuel gauge. Opening the filler cap may result in an inrush of air. This vacuum is entirely normal and results from the sealing of the fuel system.
Practical information
F If your vehicle has Keyless Entry and Starting, unlock the vehicle.
F Press the filler flap (on the rear side of the vehicle) then pull it.
If your vehicle is fitted with Stop & Start, never refuel with the engine in STOP mode; you must switch off the ignition using the key, or the START/STOP button if your vehicle has Keyless Entry and Starting.
FTake care to select the pump that delivers the correct fuel type for your vehicle's engine (reminder on a label on the inside of the filler flap).
F Introduce the key into the filler cap, if your vehicle has a normal key.
FTurn the filler cap to the left.
F Remove the filler cap and hang it on its carrier (on the filler flap).
F Introduce the nozzle and push it in fully (pushing on the metal non-return valve A).
F Fill the tank. Do not continue past the third cut-off of the nozzle, as this may cause malfunctions.
F Refit the filler cap turning it to the right. F Push the filler flap to close it (your vehicle
must be unlocked).
7
213
Practical information
Your vehicle is fitted with a catalytic converter, a device which helps to reduce the level of harmful emissions in the exhaust gases. For petrol engines, you must use unleaded fuel only. The filler neck is narrower, admitting petrol nozzles only.
If you have put in the wrong fuel for your vehicle, you must have have the tank drained and refilled with the correct fuel before you start the engine.
Diesel misfuel prevention
Mechanical device which prevents filling the tank of a Diesel vehicle with petrol. It avoids the risk of engine damage that can result from filling with the wrong fuel. Located in the filler neck, the misfuel prevention device appears when the filler cap is removed.
It is still possible to use a fuel can to fill the tank but this must be done slowly. In order to ensure a good flow of fuel, do not place the nozzle of the fuel can in direct contact with the flap of the misfuel prevention device.
Low fuel level
When the low fuel level in the tank is reached, this warning lamp comes on in the instrument panel, accompanied by an audible warning and a message. When it first comes on, less than 6 litres of fuel remain in the tank. You must refuel as soon as possible to avoid running out.
Fuel supply cut-off
Your vehicle is equipped with a safety device which cuts off the fuel supply in the event of a collision.
When a petrol filler nozzle is introduced into the fuel filler neck of a Diesel vehicle, it comes into contact with the flap. The system remains closed and prevents filling. Do not persist but introduce a Diesel filler nozzle.
Travelling abroad
As Diesel fuel pump nozzles may be different in other countries, the presence of the misfuel prevention device may make refuelling impossible. Not all Diesel vehicles are fitted with misfuel protection, so before travelling abroad, we recommend that you check with the PEUGEOT dealer network, whether your vehicle is suitable for the fuel pumps in the country in which you intend to travel.
214
Practical information
Fuel used for petrol engines
The petrol engines are compatible with bio-fuels that conform to current and future European standards and can be obtained from filling stations:
- Petrol that meets the EN228 standard, mixed with a biofuel meeting the EN15376 standard.
The only petrol additives authorised for use are those that meet the B715001 standard.
Travelling abroad
Certain fuels could damage the engine of your vehicle. In certain countries, the use of a particular fuel may be required (specific octane rating, specific sales name...) to ensure correct operation of the engine. For any additional information, contact your dealer.
Fuel used for Diesel engines
The Diesel engines are compatible with biofuels that conform to current and future European standards and can be obtained from filling stations:
- Diesel fuel that meets standard EN590 mixed with a biofuel that meets standard EN14214 (possibly containing up to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester),
- Diesel fuel that meets standard EN16734 mixed with a biofuel that meets standard EN14214 (possibly containing up to 10 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester),
- Paraffinic Diesel fuel that meets standard EN15940 mixed with a biofuel that meets standard EN14214 (possibly containing up to 7 % Fatty Acid Methyl Ester).
The use of B20 or B30 fuel meeting standard EN16709 is possible in your Diesel engine. However, this use, even occasional, requires strict application of the special servicing conditions referred to as "Arduous conditions".
For more information, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
The use of any other type of (bio) fuel (vegetable or animal oils, pure or diluted, domestic fuel...) is strictly prohibited (risk of damage to the engine and fuel system).
7
The only Diesel additives authorised for use are those that meet the B715000 standard.
215
Practical information
Snow chains
In wintry conditions, snow chains improve traction as well as the behaviour of the vehicle when braking.
The snow chains must be fitted only to the front wheels. They must never be fitted to "space-saver" type spare wheels.
Take account of the legislation in force in your country on the use of snow chains and the maximum running speed authorised.
It is strongly recommended that before you leave, you practise fitting the snow chains on a level and dry surface.
Use only the chains designed to be fitted to the type of wheel fitted to your vehicle:
Original tyre size
195/65 R15 205/55 R16 225/45 R17 225/40 R18 235/35 R19
Type of chain
9 mm links K-Summit K23 Polaire Grip 70
You can also use snow socks. For more information on snow chains, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Advice on installation
F If you have to fit the chains during a journey, stop the vehicle on a flat surface on the side of the road.
F Apply the parking brake and position any wheel chocks to prevent movement of your vehicle.
F Fit the chains following the instructions provided by the manufacturer.
F Move off gently and drive for a few moments, without exceeding 30 mph (50 km/h).
F Stop your vehicle and check that the snow chains are correctly tightened.
Avoid driving with snow chains on roads that have been cleared of snow, to avoid damaging your vehicle's tyres and the road surface. If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, check that no part of the chain or its fixings is in contact with the wheel rim.
216
Very cold climate screen
Removable screen which prevents the accumulation of snow at the radiator cooling fan.
Before fitting or removing the screen, ensure that the engine is off and the cooling fan has stopped. It is recommended that the screen be fitted and removed by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Removal
FUse a screwdriver as a lever to unclip each retaining clip in turn.
Fitting
Do not forget to remove the very cold climate screen: - when the ambient temperature exceeds
10° C (for example: in summer, ...), - when towing, - at speeds above 75 mph (120 km/h).
F Offer up the screen to the front of the top section of the front bumper upper grille.
F Press on the screen to engage its fixing clips.
Practical information
7
217
Practical information
Towing a trailer
Blanking cover
Your vehicle is primarily designed for transporting people and luggage, but it may also be used for towing a trailer.
We recommend the use of genuine PEUGEOT towbars and their harnesses that have been tested and approved from the design stage of your vehicle, and that the fitting of the towbar is entrusted to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. If the towbar is not fitted by a PEUGEOT dealer, it must still be fitted in accordance with the vehicle manufacturer's instructions.
When towing, you must remove the blanking cover if your vehicle has one. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for this.
The cover is located behind the lower air intake grille.
218
Driving with a trailer places greater demands on the towing vehicle and the driver must take particular care.
For more information on Driving advice, particularly when towing, refer to the corresponding section.
For more information on Weights (and the towed loads which apply to your vehicle) refer to the corresponding section.
You must observe the maximum trailer weight, indicated on the registration certificate or in the technical specification for your vehicle.
GTi towbar
Your vehicle cannot be fitted with a towbar.
Practical information
Energy economy mode
System which manages the duration of use of certain functions to conserve a sufficient level of charge in the battery. After the engine has stopped, you can still use functions such as the audio and telematics system, windscreen wipers, dipped beam headlamps, courtesy lamps, etc. for a maximum combined duration of about forty minutes.
Switching to economy mode
A message appears in the instrument panel screen indicating that the vehicle has switched to economy mode and the active functions are put on standby. If a telephone call is being made at this time, it will be maintained for around 10 minutes with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio system.
Exiting economy mode
These functions are reactivated automatically next time the vehicle is driven. In order to restore the use of these functions immediately, start the engine and let it run: - for less than ten minutes, to use the
equipment for approximately five minutes, - for more than ten minutes, to use the
equipment for up to approximately thirty minutes. Let the engine run for the duration specified to ensure that the battery charge is sufficient. Do not repeatedly and continuously restart the engine in order to charge the battery. A flat battery prevents the engine from starting.
Load reduction mode
System which manages the use of certain functions according to the level of charge remaining in the battery. When the vehicle is being driven, the load reduction function temporarily deactivates certain functions, such as the air conditioning, the heated rear screen... The deactivated functions are reactivated automatically as soon as conditions permit.
7
For more information on the 12 V battery, refer to the corresponding section.
219
Practical information
Accessories
A wide range of accessories and genuine parts is available from the PEUGEOT dealer network. These accessories and parts are all suitable for your vehicle and benefit from PEUGEOT's recommendation and warranty.
Conversion kits
You can obtain an "Enterprise" kit to convert a trade vehicle to a private car and vice-versa.
"Comfort"
Door deflectors, side blinds and rear blind, cigarette lighter, boot dividers, coat hanger fixed to head restraint, front centre armrest, under shelf storage, front and rear parking sensors, styling mudflaps, window film, boot management system, ...
"Transport solutions"
Boot liners, roof bars, bicycle carrier on roof bars, ski carrier, roof box, towbar harness, ... Tow bar, which mst be fitted by PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
220
"Styling"
alloy wheels from 15 inch to 18 inch, finishers for wheels, door sills, gear lever knobs, ... "Ligne S": 16 and 17 inch alloy wheels, body kit, stickers, interior and exterior mirror shells, gear lever knob, door sills, mats*, ...
"Multimedia"
Multimedia support, hands-free kit, DVD player, driving aids, vehicle tracking system, ...
"Security and safety"
Anti-theft alarm, window engraving, wheel security bolts, child seats and booster cushions, breathalyzer, first aid kit, warning triangle, high visibility jacket, stolen vehicle tracking system, temporary puncture repair kit, snow chains, non-slip covers, front foglamps kit, dog guard, ...
"Protection"
Mats*, seat covers compatible with lateral airbags, mud flaps, side protection rubbing strips, bumper protection rubbing strips, bumper protectors, boot sill finishers, boot mat,...
*To avoid any risk of jamming of the pedals: - ensure that the mat is positioned and secured correctly, - never fit one mat on top of another.
Installation of radio communication transmitters
Before installing any after-market radio communication transmitter, you can contact a PEUGEOT dealer for the specification of transmitters which can be fitted (frequency, maximum power, aerial position, specific installation requirements), in line with the Vehicle Electromagnetic Compatibility Directive (2004/104/EC).
By visiting a PEUGEOT dealer, you can also obtain products for cleaning and maintenance (exterior and interior) - including ecological products in the "TECHNATURE" range, topping up products (screenwash...), touch-up pens and paint aerosols for the exact colour of your vehicle, refills (cartridge for the temporary puncture repair kit...), ...
Depending on the legislation in force in the country, certain safety equipment may be compulsory: high visibility safety vests, warning triangles, breathalyzers, spare bulbs, spare fuses, fire extinguisher, first aid kit, mud flaps at the rear of the vehicle.
The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories which are not recommended by PEUGEOT may result in a failure of your vehicle's electronic system and excessive electrical consumption. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer for information on the range of recommended equipment and accessories.
Practical information
7
221
Practical information
Changing a wiper blade
Before removing a front wiper blade
Fitting
F Put the corresponding new wiper blade in place and clip it.
F Fold down the wiper arm carefully.
Bicycle / accessory carrier
F Within one minute after switching off the ignition, operate the wiper stalk to position the wiper blades vertically on the windscreen.
Removing
F Raise the corresponding wiper arm. FUnclip the wiper blade and remove it.
After fitting a front wiper blade
F Switch on the ignition. F Operate the wiper stalk again to park the
wiper blades.
Do not fit an accessory carrier to the tailgate.
222
Practical information
Fitting roof bars
When fitting roof bars, you must only secure them to the four anchorage points on the sides of the roof. These points are hidden by the vehicle's doors when they are closed.
Do not exceed the maximum authorised load, shown in the instructions for the roof bars.
If the height exceeds 40 cm, adapt the speed of the vehicle to the profile of the road to avoid damaging the roof bars and the fixings on the roof. Be sure to refer to national legislation in order to comply with the regulations for transporting objects which are longer than the vehicle.
Fitting on longitudinal bars
As a safety measure and to avoid damaging the roof, it is essential to use the transverse bars approved for your vehicle. Observe the instructions on fitting and use contained in the guide supplied with the roof bars.
Recommendations
- Distribute the load evenly, avoiding overloading on one side.
- Arrange the heaviest part of the load as close as possible to the roof.
- Lash the load securely. - Drive gently: the vehicle will be more
susceptible to the effects of side winds and the stability of the vehicle may be affected. - On a long journey, check the security of the load at every stop. - Remove the roof bars once they are no longer needed.
7
Use accessories approved by PEUGEOT observing the manufacturer's recommendations and fitting instructions so as to avoid the risk of damaging the body (deformation, scratches, ...).
You must attach the transverse bars at the engraved markings on the longitudinal bars.
223
RECOMMENDS
PEUGEOT & TOTAL,
A PARTNERSHIP TO DELIVER BETTER PERFORMANCE!
2015 was marked by PEUGEOT's return to Rally-Raid, one of the most difficult motorsport disciplines in the world. To obtain the best performance in these trials, PEUGEOT Sport chose TOTAL QUARTZ for the PEUGEOT 2008 DKR, a lubricant of high technology which protects the engine in the most severe conditions.
TOTAL QUARTZ protects your engine against the effects of time. TOTAL QUARTZ Ineo First is a high performance lubricant, the result of work done together by PEUGEOT and TOTAL R&D. Specially formulated for the engines in PEUGEOT vehicles, its innovative technology significantly reduces CO2 emissions and keeps your engine clean.
Bonnet
Before doing anything under the bonnet, deactivate the Stop & Start system to avoid any risk of injury resulting from an automatic change to START mode.
Practical information
Opening
F Open the door.
F Pull the safety catch towards you, then raise the bonnet.
FUnclip the stay from its housing and place it in the support slot to hold the bonnet open.
F Pull the release lever, located at the bottom of the door aperture, towards you.
Do not open the bonnet under very windy conditions. When the engine is hot, handle the exterior safety catch and the stay with care (risk of burns). To avoid damaging electrical units, it is strictly forbidden to use a high pressure jet wash under the bonnet.
Closing
FTake the stay out of its support slot. F Clip the stay back into its housing. F Lower the bonnet and release it at the end
of its travel. F Pull on the bonnet to check that it has
latched correctly.
7
225
Practical information
Petrol engine
1. Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir. 2. Coolant header tank. 3. Brake fluid filler cap. 4. Battery / Fuses. 5. Fusebox. 6. Air filter. 7.Engine oil dipstick. 8.Engine oil filler cap. 9. Remote earth point.
This engine is shown as an example. The locations of the engine oil dipstick and filler cap may vary.
226
Diesel engine
1. Screenwash and headlamp wash reservoir. 2. Coolant header tank. 3. Brake fluid filler cap. 4. Battery / Fuses. 5. Fusebox. 6. Air filter. 7.Engine oil dipstick. 8.Engine oil filler cap. 9. Priming pump*. 10. Remote earth point.
Practical information
This engine is shown as an example. The locations of the engine oil dipstick and filler cap may vary.
7
* According to engine. 227
Practical information
Checking levels
Check all of these levels regularly, in line with the manufacturer's service schedule. Top them up if necessary, unless otherwise indicated. If a level drops significantly, have the corresponding system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Take care when working under the bonnet, as certain areas of the engine may be extremely hot (risk of burns) and the cooling fan could start at any time (even with the ignition off).
Engine oil level
The check is carried out either when the ignition is switched on using the oil level indicator in the instrument panel for vehicles so equipped, or using the dipstick.
To ensure that the reading is correct, your vehicle must be parked on a level surface with the engine having been off for more than 30 minutes.
It is normal to top-up the oil level between two services (or oil changes). PEUGEOT recommends that you check the level, and top-up if necessary, every 3 000 miles (5 000 kms).
Checking using the dipstick
The location of the dipstick is shown in the corresponding underbonnet layout view. FTake the dipstick by its coloured grip and
remove it completely. F Wipe the end of the dipstick using a clean
non-fluffy cloth. F Refit the dipstick and push fully down, then
pull it out again to make the visual check: the correct level is between the marks A and B.
A = MAX
B = MIN
If you find that the level is above the A mark or below the B mark, do not start the engine. - If the level is above the MAX mark (risk
of damage to the engine), contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. - If the level is below the MIN mark, you must top-up the engine oil.
228
Practical information
Oil grade
Before topping-up the oil or changing the oil, check that the oil is the correct grade for your engine and conforms to the manufacturer's recommendations.
Brake fluid level
After topping-up the oil, the check when switching on the ignition with the oil level indicator in the instrument panel is not valid during the 30 minutes after topping-up.
Topping-up the engine oil level
The location of the oil filler cap is shown in the corresponding underbonnet layout view. FUnscrew the oil filler cap to reveal the filler
aperture. F Add oil in small quantities, avoiding any
spills on engine components (risk of fire). F Wait a few minutes before checking the
level again using the dipstick. F Add more oil if necessary. F After checking the level, carefully refit the
oil filler cap and the dipstick in its tube.
Engine oil change
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule for details of the interval for this operation. In order to maintain the reliability of the engine and emission control system, never use additives in the engine oil.
The brake fluid level must be between the marking "A" (MAX located on the remote reservoir) and the marking "B" (MIN located on the main reservoir). If it is not, check the brake pad wear.
Changing the fluid
Refer to the personalised service schedule for your vehicle for details of the interval for this operation.
7
Fluid specification
The brake fluid must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.
229
Practical information
Coolant level
The coolant level should be close to the "MAX" mark but should never exceed it. When the engine is warm, the temperature of the coolant is regulated by the fan.
The cooling fan may start after switching off the engine: take care with articles and clothing that might be caught by the fan blades.
In addition, as the cooling system is pressurised, wait at least one hour after switching off the engine before carrying out any work. To avoid any risk of scalding, unscrew the cap by two turns to allow the pressure to drop. When the pressure has dropped, remove the cap and top-up the level.
It is normal to top-up the coolant level between services (or coolant replacements).
Fluid specification
The coolant must conform to the manufacturer's recommendations.
Screenwash and headlamp wash fluid
In the case of vehicles fitted with headlamp washers, the low fluid level is indicated by an audible signal and a message in the instrument panel screen. Top-up the reservoir when you next stop the vehicle.
Fluid specification
For optimum cleaning and to avoid freezing, this fluid must not be topped-up with or replaced with plain water.
In wintry conditions, the use of an ethyl alcohol or methanol base fluid is recommended.
Diesel additive level (Diesel engine with particle filter)
A low additive level is indicated by illumination of this warning lamp, accompanied by an audible warning and a message in the instrument panel screen.
Topping-up
This additive must be topped-up by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay.
Used products
Avoid prolonged contact of used oil or fluids with the skin. Most of these fluids are harmful to health or indeed very corrosive.
Do not discard used oil or fluids into sewers or onto the ground. Take used oil to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop (France) or to an authorised waste disposal site.
230
Practical information
Checks
Unless otherwise indicated, check these components in accordance with the manufacturer's service schedule and according to your engine. Otherwise, have them checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
12 V battery
The battery does not require any maintenance. However, check regularly that the terminals are correctly tightened (versions without quick release terminals) and that the connections are clean. For more information and the precautions to take before starting work on the 12 V battery, refer to the corresponding section.
Versions equipped with Stop & Start are fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of specific technology and specification. Its replacement should be carried out only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Air filter and passenger compartment filter
Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule for details of the replacement intervals for these components. Depending on the environment (e.g. dusty atmosphere) and the use of the vehicle (e.g. city driving), replace them twice as often if necessary. A clogged passenger compartment filter may have an adverse effect on the performance of the air conditioning system and generate undesirable odours.
Oil filter
Replace the oil filter each time the engine oil is changed. Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule for details of the replacement interval for this component.
Particle filter (Diesel)
The start of saturation of the particle filter is indicated by the temporary illumination of this warning lamp accompanied by a message in the multifunction screen.
As soon as the traffic conditions permit, regenerate the filter by driving at a speed of at least 40 mph (60 km/h) until the warning lamp goes off. If the warning lamp stays on, this indicates a low additive level. For more information on Checking levels, refer to the corresponding section.
On a new vehicle, the first particle filter regeneration operations may be accompanied by a "burning" smell, which is perfectly normal. Following prolonged operation of the vehicle at very low speed or at idle, you may, in exceptional circumstances, notice the emission of water vapour at the exhaust on acceleration. This does not affect the behaviour of the vehicle or the environment.
7
231
Practical information
Manual gearbox
The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change). Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule for the checking interval for this component.
Automatic gearbox
The gearbox does not require any maintenance (no oil change). Refer to the manufacturer's service schedule for the checking interval for this component.
Parking brake
If excessive travel or a loss of effectiveness of this system is noticed, the parking brake must be checked, even between two services.
Checking this system must be done by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Brake pads
Brake wear depends on the style of driving, particularly in the case of vehicles used in town, over short distances. It may be necessary to have the condition of the brakes checked, even between vehicle services. Unless there is a leak in the circuit, a drop in the brake fluid level indicates that the brake pads are worn.
Brake disc wear
For information on checking brake disc wear, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Electric parking brake
This system does not require any routine servicing. However, in the event of a problem, have the system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
For more information on the Electric parking brake, refer to the corresponding section.
Only use products recommended by PEUGEOT or products of equivalent quality and specification. In order to optimise the operation of units as important as those in the braking system, PEUGEOT selects and offers very specific products. After washing the vehicle, dampness, or in wintry conditions, ice can form on the brake discs and pads: braking efficiency may be reduced. Make light brake applications to dry and defrost the brakes.
232
AdBlue® and SCR system for BlueHDi Diesel engines
The AdBlue® is held in a special tank with a capacity of about 17 litres: this provides a driving range of about 12 500 miles (20 000 km). An alert is triggered automatically to warn you when the reserve level is reached: you can then drive about 1 500 miles (2 400 km) before the tank is empty.
To assure respect for the environment and conformity with the new Euro 6 emissions standard, without adversely affecting the performance or fuel consumption of Diesel engines, PEUGEOT has taken the decision to equip its vehicles with an effective system that associates SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction) with a particle filter (FAP) for the treatment of exhaust gases.
During each scheduled service of your vehicle by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, the AdBlue® tank is refilled in order to allow normal operation of the SCR system.
If the estimated mileage of your vehicle between two services is greater than 12 500 miles (20 000 km), it will be necessary to top-up the AdBlue®.
SCR system
Using a fluid called AdBlue® containing urea, a catalytic converter turns up to 85% of nitrogen oxides (NOx) into nitrogen and water, which are harmless to health and the environment.
Practical information
Once the AdBlue® tank is empty, a system required by regulations prevents starting of the engine. If the SCR system is faulty, the level of emissions from your vehicle will no longer meet the Euro 6 standard: your vehicle becomes polluting. In the event of a confirmed fault with the SCR system, you must go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop as soon as possible: after a running distance of 650 miles (1 100 km), a system will be triggered automatically to prevent engine starting. In either case, a range indicator gives you the distance you can travel before the vehicle is immobilised.
7
233
Practical information
Topping-up the AdBlue®
Filling the AdBlue® tank is an operation included in every routine service on your vehicle by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Nevertheless, given the capacity of the tank, it may be necessary to top-up the fluid between services, more particularly if an alert (warning lamps and a message) signals the requirement. You can go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. If you envisage topping-up yourself, please read the following warnings carefully.
Important If your vehicle's AdBlue® tank is completely empty (which is confirmed by the alert messages and the impossibility of starting the engine) you must add at least 3.8 litres (so two 1.89 litre bottles).
Precautions in use
AdBlue® is a urea-based solution. This liquid is non-flammable, colourless and odourless (kept in a cool area). In the event of contact with the skin, wash the affected area with soap and water. In the event of contact with the eyes, wash (irrigate) the eyes with large amounts of water or with an eye wash solution for at least 15 minutes. If a burning sensation or irritation persists, get medical attention. If swallowed, immediately wash out the mouth with clean water and then drink plenty of water. In certain conditions (high ambient temperature, for example), the risk of release of ammonia cannot be excluded: do not inhale the fluid. Ammonia vapour has an irritant effect on mucous membranes (eyes, nose and throat).
Keep AdBlue® out of the reach of children, in its original container or bottle. Never transfer AdBlue® to another container: it would lose its purity.
Use only AdBlue® fluid that meets the ISO 22241 standard.
Never dilute AdBlue® with water. Never pour AdBlue® into the Diesel fuel tank.
The supply in a non-drip container or bottle simplifies topping-up. You can obtain 1.89 litre (half a US gallon) bottles or 5 litre containers from a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Never top-up from an AdBlue® dispenser reserved for heavy goods vehicles.
234
Practical information
Recommendations on storage
AdBlue® freezes at about -11°C and deteriorates above 25°C. It is recommended that bottles be stored in a cool area and protected from direct sunlight. Under these conditions, the fluid can be kept for at least a year. If the additive has frozen, it can be used once it has completely thawed out.
Procedure
Before starting the top-up procedure, ensure that the vehicle is parked on a flat and level surface.
F Switch off the ignition and remove the key, or if your vehicle has one, press the START/STOP button to switch off the engine.
Never store bottles of AdBlue® in your vehicle.
Do not dispose of AdBlue® bottles or containers in the household waste. Place them in a container provided for this purpose or take them to your dealer.
Freezing of the AdBlue® AdBlue® freezes at temperatures below around -11°C. The SCR system includes a heater for the AdBlue® tank, allowing you to continue driving in very cold conditions.
F For access to the AdBlue® tank, raise the boot carpet then, depending on equipment, lift out the spare wheel and/or the storage box.
F Without pressing, turn the black cap a quarter turn anti-clockwise and lift it off.
7
FTurn the blue cap a 6th of a turn anticlockwise.
F Lift off the cap.
235
Practical information
F Obtain a bottle of AdBlue®. After first checking the use-by date, read carefully the instructions on use on the label before pouring the contents of the bottle into your vehicle's AdBlue® tank.
F After emptying the bottle, wipe away any spillage around the tank filler using a damp cloth.
If any AdBlue® fluid is spilt or splashed, wash immediately with cold water or wipe with a damp cloth. If the AdBlue® has crystallised, clean it off using a sponge and hot water.
F Refit the blue cap to the tank and turn it a 6th of a turn clockwise, to its stop.
F Refit the black cap and turn it a quarter of a turn clockwise without pressing. Ensure that the indicator on the cap lines up with the indicator on the support.
F Depending on equipment, return the spare wheel and/or the storage box to the bottom of the boot.
F Refit the boot carpet and close the tailgate.
Important: when topping-up after running out of AdBlue®, signalled by the message "Top-up AdBlue: Starting prevented", you must wait for about 5 minutes before switching the ignition on again, without opening the driver's door, unlocking the vehicle, introducing the remote control key into the ignition switch, or placing the electronic key of the "Keyless Entry and Starting" system inside the vehicle. Switch on the ignition, then wait for 10 seconds before starting the engine.
Never dispose of AdBlue® bottles in the household waste. Place them in a special container provided for this purpose or take them to your dealer.
236
Version with bass woofer unit
Practical information
- Carefully disengage the wiring harness from its housing to give a little more free length.
- Remove the yellow screw retaining the woofer unit.
F Place the bass woofer unit to the side of the boot.
F Remove or raise the storage well.
For reassembly, first slacken the yellow screw a few turns.
7
237
In the event of a breakdown
Warning triangle (stowing)
This safety equipment should be used in addition to the hazard warning lamps. Its presence in the vehicle is mandatory.
Placing the triangle in the road
The storage location for a folded triangle or its box is under the boot floor.
Before leaving your vehicle to set up and install the triangle, switch on the hazard warning lamps and put on your high visibility vest.
F Place the triangle behind the vehicle, as required by the legislation in force in your country.
Refer to the manufacturer's instructions on unfolding and installing supplied with the triangle.
The triangle is available as an accessory; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
238
Temporary puncture repair kit
This kit consists of a compressor and a sealant cartridge. It allows the temporary repair of a tyre. You are then able to go to the nearest garage. It is designed to repair most punctures which could affect the tyre, located on the tyre tread or shoulder. Its compressor can be used to check and adjust the pressure of the tyre.
List of tools
These tools are specific to your vehicle and can vary according to equipment. Do not use them for other purposes.
In the event of a breakdown
Access to the kit
The tyre inflation pressures are given on this label.
1. 12 V compressor. To temporarily repair a tyre using an
integral sealant cartridge and adjust the tyre pressure. 2.Towing eye.
For more information on Towing, refer to the corresponding section.
The 12 V socket at the rear of the vehicle allows the connection of the compressor for long enough to repair or inflate a tyre.
8
This kit is installed in the storage box, under the boot floor.
239
In the event of a breakdown
Description of the kit
A. "Sealant" or "Air" position selector. B. On "I" / off "O" switch. C. Deflation button. D. Pressure gauge (in bars and psi).
240
E. Compartment housing a cable with an adaptor for a 12 V socket.
F. Sealant cartridge. G. White pipe with cap for repair and inflation. H. Speed limit sticker.
The speed limit sticker H must be affixed to the vehicle's steering wheel to remind you that a wheel is in temporary use. Do not exceed a speed of 50 mph (80 km/h) when driving with a tyre repaired using this type of kit.
Repair procedure
1. Sealing
In the event of a breakdown
F Switch off the ignition. FTurn the selector A to the "sealant" position.
F Check that the switch B is in position "O".
Avoid removing any foreign bodies which have penetrated into the tyre.
FUncoil the white pipe G fully. FUnscrew the cap from the white pipe. F Connect the white pipe to the valve of the
tyre to be repaired.
Take care, this product is harmful if swallowed and causes irritation to the eyes. Keep this product out of the reach of children.
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Start the vehicle and leave the engine running.
Do not start the compressor before connecting the white pipe to the tyre valve: the sealant product would be expelled through the pipe.
8
241
In the event of a breakdown
F Switch on the compressor by moving the switch B to position "I" until the tyre pressure reaches 2.0 bars.
The sealant is injected into the tyre under pressure; do not disconnect the pipe from the valve during this operation (risk of splashing).
If after around 5 to 7 minutes the pressure is not attained, this indicates that the tyre is not repairable; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for assistance.
F Remove the kit and screw the cap back on the white pipe.
Take care to avoid staining your vehicle with traces of fluid. Keep the kit to hand.
F Drive immediately for approximately three miles (five kilometres), at reduced speed (between 12 and 37 mph (20 and 60 km/h)), to plug the puncture.
F Stop to check the repair and the tyre pressure using the kit.
242
2. Inflation
In the event of a breakdown
FTurn the selector A to the "Air" position.
FUncoil the white pipe G fully. F Connect the white pipe to the tyre valve.
F Connect the compressor's electric plug to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Start the vehicle again and leave the engine running.
As soon as possible, go to a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. You must inform the technician that you have used this kit. After inspection, the technician will advise you on whether the tyre can be repaired or if it must be replaced.
F Adjust the pressure using the compressor (to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to deflate: switch B in position "O" and press button C), in accordance with the vehicle's tyre pressure label (located on the lefthand door aperture). A loss of pressure indicates that the puncture has not been fully plugged; contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified workshop for assistance.
F Remove and stow the kit. F Drive at reduced speed (50 mph [80 km/h]
max) limiting the distance travelled to approximately 120 miles (200 km).
8
243
In the event of a breakdown
Removing the pipe and cartridge
FTurn the pipe assembly 2 to the left until it contacts the unit.
F Disconnect the union 1 from the cartridge by turning it a quarter turn anti-clockwise.
FExtract the pipe assembly 2, then disconnect the union 3 from the air delivery pipe by turning it a quarter turn anticlockwise.
F Remove the pipe assembly 2. F Support the compressor vertically. FUnscrew the cartridge 4 from the bottom. To fit the new cartridge and new pipe, carry out these operations in reverse order.
Beware of discharges of fluid. The expiry date of the fluid is indicated on the cartridge. The sealant cartridge is designed for single use; even if only partly used, it must be replaced. After use, do not discard the cartridge into the environment, take it to an authorised waste disposal site or a PEUGEOT dealer. Do not forget to obtain a new sealant cartridge, available from PEUGEOT dealers or from a qualified workshop.
244
Checking / adjusting tyre pressures
In the event of a breakdown
You can also use the compressor without injecting any product, to check and if necessary adjust your tyre pressures.
FTurn the selector A to the "Air" position.
FUncoil the white pipe G fully. F Connect the pipe to the tyre valve.
F Connect the compressor's electrical connector to the vehicle's 12 V socket.
F Start the vehicle and let the engine run. F Adjust the pressure using the compressor
(to inflate: switch B in position "I"; to deflate: switch B in position "O" and press button C), according to the vehicle's tyre pressure label. F Remove the kit then stow it.
Should the pressure of one or more tyres be adjusted, it is necessary to reinitialise the under-inflation detection system. For more information on Underinflation detection, refer to the corresponding section.
8
245
In the event of a breakdown
Spare wheel
Procedure for changing a wheel with a damaged or punctured tyre for the spare wheel using the tools provided with the vehicle.
Access to the tooling
List of tools
These tools are specific to your vehicle and can vary according to the level of equipment. Do not use them for other purposes.
3. Wheel bolt cover removal tool. For removing the bolt head protectors on alloy wheels.
4. Socket for the security bolts (located in the glove box). For adapting the wheelbrace to the special "security" bolts.
5.Towing eye.
The tools are installed in the boot under the floor.
The jack must only be used to change a wheel with a damaged tyre. The jack does not require any maintenance.
The jack conforms to European legislation, such as defined in the Machinery Directive 2006/42/CE.
1. Wheelbrace. For removing the wheel trim and removing the wheel bolts.
2. Jack with integral handle. For raising the vehicle.
For more information on Towing, refer to the corresponding section.
Wheel with trim
When refitting the wheel, refit the trim starting by placing its notch facing the valve and press around its edge with the palm of your hand.
246
Access to the spare wheel
Putting the wheel back in place
In the event of a breakdown
The spare wheel is located in the boot under the floor. Depending on the country of sale, the spare wheel may be steel, alloy or of the "spacesaver" type.
Taking out the wheel
FUnscrew the (coloured) central nut. F Remove the fixing parts (nut and bolt). F Raise the spare wheel towards you from
the rear. FTake the wheel out of the boot.
F Put the wheel back in its housing. FUnscrew the (coloured) central nut by a few
turns on the bolt. F Put the fixing parts (nut and bolt) in place in
the middle of the wheel. FTighten fully until the central nut clicks to
retain the wheel correctly.
F Put the box back in place in the centre of the wheel and clip it.
F Put the polystyrene storage box back in place.
8
247
In the event of a breakdown
Removing a wheel
Parking the vehicle
Immobilise the vehicle where it does not block traffic: the ground must be level, stable and not slippery. With a manual parking brake, apply the parking brake and check that the brake warning lamp is on.
With an electric parking brake, if not programmed in automatic mode, apply the parking brake and check that the brake warning lamp and the P indicator lamp in the parking brake control lever are on.
Switch off the ignition. With a manual gearbox, engage first gear to block the wheels.
With an automatic gearbox, place the selector at position P to block the wheels. The occupants must get out of the vehicle and wait where they are safe. Never go underneath a vehicle raised using a jack; use an axle stand.
F Remove the bolt cover(s) using the tool 3 (according to equipment).
F Fit the security socket 4 on the wheelbrace 1 to slacken the security bolt (if fitted).
F Slacken the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.
F Position the foot of the jack on the ground, ensuring that it is directly below the vehicle's jacking point A or B, the one closest to the wheel to be changed.
Do not use: - the jack for any other purpose than
lifting the vehicle, - a jack other than the one supplied
by the manufacturer.
248
In the event of a breakdown
FExtend the jack 2 until its head comes into contact with the jacking point A or B used, with the contact surface A or B on the vehicle correctly engaged with the central part of the head of the jack.
F Raise the vehicle until there is sufficient space between the wheel and the ground to admit the spare (not punctured) wheel easily.
Ensure that the jack is stable. If the ground is slippery or loose, the jack may slip or drop Risk of injury! Ensure that the jack is positioned only at one of the jacking points A or B under the vehicle, making sure that the vehicle's contact surface is centred on the head of the jack. Otherwise there is a risk of damage to the vehicle and/or of the jack dropping - Risk of injury!
F Remove the bolts and store them in a clean place.
F Remove the wheel.
8
249
In the event of a breakdown
Fitting a wheel
Fitting the "space-saver" spare wheel
If your vehicle is fitted with alloy wheels, when tightening the bolts on fitting, it is normal to notice that the washers do not come into contact with the "space-saver" spare wheel. The wheel is secured by the conical surface of each bolt.
F Put the wheel in place on the hub. F Screw in the bolts fully by hand. F Pre-tighten the security bolt using the
wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security socket 4 (according to equipment). F Pre-tighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.
F Lower the vehicle fully. F Fold the jack 2 and detach it.
250
In the event of a breakdown
FTighten the security bolt using the wheelbrace 1 fitted with the security socket 4 (according to equipment).
FTighten the other bolts using the wheelbrace 1 only.
F Refit the bolt cover(s) (according to version).
F Store the tools in the box.
After changing a wheel
To store the punctured wheel in the boot correctly, first remove the central cover. When using the "space-saver" type spare wheel, do not exceed 50 mph (80 km/h). Have the tightening of the bolts and the pressure of the spare wheel checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop without delay. Have the punctured wheel repaired and refitted to the vehicle as soon as possible. If your vehicle has tyre under-inflation detection, check the tyre pressures then reinitialise the system. For more information on Underinflation detection, refer to the corresponding section.
The tyre inflation pressures are given on this label.
8
251
In the event of a breakdown
Changing a bulb
Front lamps
Model with halogen headlamps
Model with "full LED" technology Front fog lamps (H11) headlamps
1. Dipped beam headlamps (H7-55W). 2. Main beam headlamps (HB3). 3. Direction indicators (PY21-21W). 4. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps
(light emitting diodes - LEDs).
For H7 type bulbs with lugs... take care to observe their correct installation so as to ensure the best lighting performance.
1. Daytime running lamps / sidelamps (light emitting diodes - LEDs).
2. Dipped beam headlamps (light emitting diodes - full LEDs).
3. Main beam headlamps (light emitting diodes - full LEDs).
4. Direction indicators (PY21-21W).
Direction indicators (GT version)
For the replacement of this type of LED lamp, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. A replacement kit for the LEDs is available from PEUGEOT dealers.
252
In the event of a breakdown
The headlamps have polycarbonate lenses with a protective coating: F do not clean them using a dry
or abrasive cloth, nor with a detergent or solvent product, F use a sponge and soapy water or a pH neutral product, F when using a high pressure washer on persistent marks, do not keep the lance directed towards the lamps or their edges for too long, so as not to damage their protective coating and seals.
Changing a bulb should only be done after the headlamp has been switched off for several minutes (risk of serious burns). F Do not touch the bulb directly with
your fingers, use a lint-free cloth. It is imperative to use only antiultraviolet (UV) type bulbs to avoid damaging the headlamp. Always replace a failed bulb with a new bulb with the same type and specification.
In some weather conditions (e.g. low temperature or humidity), the presence of misting on the internal surface of the glass of the headlamps and rear lamps is normal; it disappears after the lamps have been on for a few minutes.
Daytime running lamps / sidelamps
For the replacement of this type of LED lamp and lighting guides, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. A replacement kit for the LEDs is available from PEUGEOT dealers.
8
253
In the event of a breakdown
Tips for removing the headlamp (halogen model)
Dipped beam headlamps (halogen model)
Main beam headlamps (halogen model)
To allow the headlamp to be moved forward a few centimetres for access to the bulbs, proceed as follows: F Move the orange clip towards the rear
then while pressing on the black part (located above the orange clip) pull on the connector. F Remove the two screws holding the lamp. F Disengage the rear pin then the front centre piece. F Move the lamp forwards.
F Remove the protective plastic cover by pulling on the tab.
F Disconnect the bulb connector. F Disengage the two springs (press then
move them outwards). FExtract the bulb by pulling and change it. For reassembly, carry out these operations in reverse order.
F Remove the protective plastic cover by pulling on the tab.
FTurn the connector (with its bulb) towards the top (1/4 turn).
F Remove the bulb by pulling it out and change it. For reassembly, carry out these operations in reverse order.
Be aware that the area behind the right-hand headlamp (facing forwards) may be hot, with the risk of burns (overflowpipe).
254
Direction indicators (halogen model)
In the event of a breakdown
Daytime running lamps / sidelamps
("full LED" technology model)
Direction indicators ("full LED" technology model)
FUnscrew the bulb holder (1/4 turn). F Remove the bulb holder. F Change the failed bulb.
For reassembly, carry out these operations in reverse order.
Faster flashing of a direction indicator warning lamp (left or right) indicates a failed bulb on that side.
For the replacement of this type of "full LED" light emitting diode lamps, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Faster flashing of a direction indicator warning lamp (left or right) indicates a failed bulb on that side.
The direction indicator bulb is located below the front lamp. FUnclip the finisher by pulling at the top
(cut-out). FUnscrew the bulb holder (1/4 turn). F Change the failed bulb. For reassembly, carry out these operations in reverse order.
8
255
In the event of a breakdown
Front foglamps
Door mirror spotlamps
You should contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for the replacement of the light-emitting diode - LED.
FUnclip the finisher by pulling at the top (cut-out).
F Remove the two screws to remove the unit from its housing.
F Disconnect the connector. FUnscrew the bulb holder (1/4 turn). F Remove the bulb holder. F Change the failed bulb. For reassembly, carry out these operations in reverse order, pressing on the finisher to refit it.
Integrated direction indicator side repeaters
You should contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop for the replacement of these bulbs.
256
In the event of a breakdown
Rear lamps (hatchback)
Reversing lamps, direction indicators (on the wings)
1. Sidelamps (light-emitting diodes - LEDs). 2. Reversing lamps (W16W). 3. Direction indicators (PY21W amber). 4. Brake lamps (light-emitting diodes - LEDs). 5. Foglamps (P21W).
F Open the tailgate then remove the access cover.
Light-emitting diodes LEDs
For replacement, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified workshop.
F Disconnect the lamp connector. F Remove the lamp fixing nut. F Carefully remove the lamp unit from
outside. FUnscrew the bulb holder (a quarter of a
turn) and change the bulb. For reassembly, carry out these operations in reverse order.
8
257
In the event of a breakdown
Foglamp (tailgate)
F Open the tailgate and then remove the large plastic cover.
FUnclip the left and right access covers. F Remove the screws located in each
opening. FUnclip the boot trim for access to the lamp
connector. F Disconnect the lamp connector. F Remove the lamp fixing nut. F Carefully remove the lamp from the
outside. FUnscrew the bulb holder (a quarter of a
turn) and change the bulb. For reassembly, carry out these operations in reverse order.
258
Rear lamps (SW)
Direction indicators (on the wings)
In the event of a breakdown
1. Sidelamps (light-emitting diodes - LEDs). 2. Direction indicators (PY21W amber). 3. Brake lamps (light-emitting diodes - LEDs). 4. Reversing lamps (W16W). 5. Foglamps (P21W).
Light emitting diodes-LEDs
For replacement, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or qualified workshop.
F Open the tailgate then remove the access cover.
F Remove the two lamp fixing nut (pipe spanner or socket recommended).
F Disengage the retaining clip, carefully removing the lamp unit from outside.
F Disconnect the lamp connector. F Remove the sealing foam. FUnclip the bulb holder by pressing on the
two tongues. F Replace the bulb. For reassembly, carry out these operations in reverse order.
8
259
In the event of a breakdown
Reversing lamp, rear foglamp (tailgate)
F Open the tailgate and then remove the access cover.
F Remove the lamp fixing nut.
F Carefully remove the lamp from the outside.
F Disconnect the lamp connector. F Foglamp: unclip the bulb holder by
pressing on the two tongues then replace the bulb. F Reversing lamp: turn the bulb holder a quarter of a turn then replace the bulb. For reassembly, carry out these operations in reverse order.
260
Third brake lamp (light-emitting diodes-LED)
Number plate lamps (W5W)
In the event of a breakdown
For the replacement of this type of lamp, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
F Insert a thin screwdriver into one of the cutouts in the lens.
F Push it outwards to unclip it. F Remove the lens. F Change the faulty bulb.
To refit, press on the lens to clip it in place.
8
261
In the event of a breakdown
Changing a fuse
Access to the tools
Changing a fuse
Before changing a fuse: F the cause of the failure must be identified
and rectified, F all electrical consumers must be switched
off, F the vehicle must be immobilised with the
ignition off, F identify the failed fuse using the tables and
layout drawings in the following pages.
The extraction tweezer is fitted to the back of the dashboard fusebox cover.
FUnclip the cover by pulling at the top left, then right.
F Disengage the cover completely and turn it over.
F Remove the tweezer from the back of the cover to which it is fitted.
To replace a fuse, you must: F use the special tweezer to extract the fuse
from its housing and check the condition of its filament, F always replace the failed fuse with a fuse of the same rating (same colour); using a different rating could cause faults (risk of fire). If the fuse fails again soon after replacement, have the vehicle's electrical system checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
Good
Failed
Tweezer
The replacement of a fuse not shown in the tables below may cause a serious malfunction of your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
262
Installing electrical accessories
Your vehicle's electrical system is designed to operate with standard or optional equipment. Before installing other electrical equipment or accessories on your vehicle, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
PEUGEOT will not accept responsibility for the cost incurred in repairing your vehicle or for rectifying malfunctions resulting from the installation of accessories not supplied and not recommended by PEUGEOT and not installed in accordance with its instructions, in particular when the combined consumption of all of the additional equipment connected exceeds 10 milliamperes.
In the event of a breakdown
8
263
In the event of a breakdown
Dashboard fuses
The fusebox is placed in the lower dashboard (left-hand side).
Access to the fuses
FUnclip the cover by pulling at top left, then right.
264
Version 1 (Full)
Fuse N°
Rating (A)
F4
5
F6 A or B
15
F11
5
F13
10
F14
10
F16
3
F17
3
F19
5
F21
10
F22
5
F24
3
F25
5
F28 A or B
15
F30
20
F31
30
F32
10
F33
3
F34
5
F35
3
Functions
Emergency and assistance calls. Audio system, touch screen, CD player, navigation. "Keyless Entry and starting" system Front 12 V accessory socket. 12 V accessory socket in the boot. Glove box lamp, rear courtesy lamp. Vanity mirror lamp, front courtesy lamp. Instrument panel. Multifunction screen, air conditioning. Reversing camera, parking sensors. Rain and sunshine sensor Airbags. Audio system (battery +). Rear wiper. Locks. Hi-Fi amplifier. Memorisation of driving positions. Electric power steering. Seat belts not fastened display.
Version 2 (Eco)
Fuse N° F9 F13 F15 F16 F17 F18 F19 F20 F21
F22/F24
Rating (A) 5 5 15 15 15 20 5 5 5 30
F23
5
F25/F27
15
F26
15
F30
15
Functions
Emergency and assistance calls. Reversing camera and parking sensors 12 V accessory socket. Cigarette lighter. Audio system. Touch screen, CD player, audio and navigation system. Rain, sunshine sensor. Airbags. Instrument panel. Interior, exterior, front and rear locks.
Glove box lamp, vanity mirror, front and rear courtesy lamps.
Front/rear screenwash pump. Horn. Rear wiper.
In the event of a breakdown
8
265
In the event of a breakdown
Engine compartment fuses
The fusebox is located in the engine compartment near the battery.
Access to the fuses
FUnclip the cover. F Change the fuse. F When you have finished, close the cover
carefully to ensure correct sealing of the fusebox.
Version 1 (Full)
Fusebox 1
Fuse N° F12 F14 F15 F19 F20 F21 F22 F23 F24
Rating (A) 5 25 5 30 15 20 15 15 15
Functions
Park Assist control unit. Front and rear screenwash pump Power steering. Front wiper motor. Front and rear screenwash motors. Headlamp wash. Horn. Right-hand main beam headlamp. Left-hand main beam headlamp.
266
Fusebox 2
Fuse N° F8 F10 F12
Rating (A) 30 5 15
Version 2 (Eco)
Fuse N°
Rating (A)
F13
5
F16
15
F18
10
F19
10
F25
40
F27
25
F28
30
F29
30
F30
80
Functions Diesel emissions control system (AdBlue®). Automatic gearbox. Automatic gearbox.
Functions Built-in systems interface. Front foglamps. Right-hand main beam headlamp. Left-hand main beam headlamp. Headlamp wash relay (aftermarket fitment). Built-in systems interface. Diesel emissions control system (AdBlue®). Front wiper motor. Pre-heater plugs (Diesel), additional programmable heating (aftermarket fitment), headlamp wash pump.
In the event of a breakdown
8
267
In the event of a breakdown
12 V battery
Procedure for starting the engine using another battery or charging a discharged battery.
General points
Lead-acid starter batteries
Batteries contain harmful substances such as sulphuric acid and lead. They must be disposed of in accordance with regulations and must not, in any circumstances, be discarded with household waste. Take used remote control batteries and vehicle batteries to a special collection point.
Protect your eyes and face before handling the battery. All operations on the battery must be carried out in a well ventilated area and away from naked flames and sources of sparks, so as to avoid the risk of explosion or fire. Wash your hands afterwards.
Versions equipped with Stop & Start are fitted with a 12 V lead-acid battery of specific technology and specification. Its replacement should be carried out only by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
If your vehicle has an automatic gearbox, do not try to start the engine by pushing the vehicle.
Before doing any work
Immobilise the vehicle: apply the parking brake, put the gearbox in neutral, then switch off the ignition. Check that all electrical equipment is switched off.
Access to the battery
The battery is located under the bonnet. To gain access to it: F Open the bonnet using the interior release
lever, then the exterior safety catch. F Secure the bonnet stay. F Remove the plastic cover to access
the (+) terminal. The (-) terminal of the battery is not accessible. A remote earth point is located on the engine.
268
In the event of a breakdown
Starting using another battery
When your vehicle's battery is discharged, the engine can be started using a slave battery (external or on another vehicle) and jump lead cables or a battery booster.
Never try to start the engine by connecting a battery charger. Never use a 24 V or higher battery booster. First check that the slave battery has a nominal voltage of 12 V and a capacity at least equal to that of the discharged battery. The two vehicles must not be in contact with each other. Switch off the electrical consumers on both vehicles (audio system, wipers, lighting, ...). Ensure that the jump lead cables do not pass close to moving parts of the engine (cooling fan, belts, ...). Do not disconnect the (+) terminal when the engine is running.
F Raise the plastic cover on the (+) terminal, if your vehicle has one.
F Connect the red cable to the positive terminal (+) of the flat battery A (at the metal elbow) then to the positive terminal (+) of the slave battery B or the booster.
F Connect one end of the green or black cable to the negative terminal (-) of the slave battery B or the booster (or earth point on the other vehicle).
F Connect the other end of the green or black cable to the earth point C on the broken down vehicle.
F Start the engine of the vehicle with the good battery and leave it running for a few minutes.
F Operate the starter on the broken down vehicle and let the engine run. If the engine does not start straight away, switch off the ignition and wait a few moments before trying again.
F Wait until the engine returns to idle then disconnect the jump lead cables in the reverse order.
F Refit the plastic cover to the (+) terminal, if your vehicle has one.
F Allow the engine to run for at least 30 minutes, by driving or with the vehicle stationary, so that the battery reaches an adequate state of charge.
Some functions, including Stop & Start, are not available if the battery is not sufficiently charged.
8
269
In the event of a breakdown
Charging the battery using a battery charger
For optimum service life of the battery, it is essential to maintain an adequate state of charge. In some circumstances it may be necessary to charge the battery: - if you use your vehicle essentially for short
journeys, - if the vehicle is to be taken off the road for
several weeks. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop.
If you envisage charging your vehicle's battery yourself, use only a charger compatible with lead-acid batteries of a nominal voltage of 12 V.
If this label is present, it is essential to use only a 12 V charger, to avoid causing irreversible damage to the electrical components related to the Stop & Start system.
Follow the instructions for use provided by the manufacturer of the charger. Never reverse polarities.
It is not necessary to disconnect the battery.
F Switch off the ignition. F Switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system, lighting, wipers, ...). F Switch off the charger B before connecting
the cables to the battery, so as to avoid any dangerous sparks. FEnsure that the charger cables are in good condition. F Raise the plastic cover, if your vehicle has one, on the (+) terminal. F Connect the charger B cables as follows: - the positive (+) red cable to
the (+) terminal of the battery A, - the negative (-) black cable to the earth
point C on the vehicle. F At the end of the charging operation, switch
off the charger B before disconnecting the cables from the battery A.
270
Never try to charge a frozen battery. If the battery has been frozen, have it checked by a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop, who will check that the internal components have not been damaged and the casing is not cracked, which could cause a leak of toxic and corrosive acid.
In the event of a breakdown
Disconnecting the battery
In order to maintain an adequate state of charge for starting the engine, it is recommended that the battery be disconnected if the vehicle is taken out of service for a long period. Before disconnecting the battery: F close all openings (doors, boot, windows,
roof), F switch off all electrical consumers (audio
system, wipers, lighting, ...), F switch off the ignition and wait for
four minutes. At the battery, detach just the (+) terminal.
Do not apply excessive force on the lever as locking will not be possible if the clamp is not positioned correctly; start the procedure again.
Quick-release terminal
Disconnecting the (+) cable
F Raise the lever D fully to release the cable terminal clamp E.
Reconnecting the (+) cable
F Position the open clamp E of the cable on the positive post (+) of the battery.
F Press vertically on the clamp E to position it correctly on the battery.
F Lock the clamp by spreading the positioning lug and then lowering the lever D.
Following reconnection of the battery
Following reconnection of the battery, switch on the ignition and wait 1 minute before starting to permit initialisation of the electronic systems. However, if problems remain following this operation, contact a PEUGEOT dealer or a qualified workshop. Referring to the corresponding section, you must yourself reinitialise (depending on version): - the remote control key, - the electric blind(s), - ...
The Stop & Start system may not be operational during the trip following the first engine start. In this case, the system will only be available again after a continuous period of immobilisation of the vehicle, a period which depends on the ambient temperature and the state of charge of the battery (up to about 8 hours).
8
271
In the event of a breakdown
Towing
Procedure for having your vehicle towed or for towing another vehicle using a removable towing eye.
Access to the tooling
Towing your vehicle
Put the gear lever into neutral. The failure to follow this requirement may lead to damage to components of the braking system and the lack of braking assistance on restarting theengine.
The towing eye is installed in the boot under the floor. To gain access to it: F open the boot, F raise the floor, F remove the towing eye from the holder.
F On the front bumper, press the cover (as shown above) to unclip it.
F Screw the towing eye in fully. F Install the towing arm. F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the
towed vehicle. F Move off gently and drive slowly over a
short distance only.
272
In the event of a breakdown
Towing another vehicle
F On the rear bumper, press the cover (as shown above) to unclip it.
F Screw the towing eye in fully. F Install the towing arm. F Switch on the hazard warning lamps on the
towed vehicle. F Move off gently and drive slowly over a
short distance only.
General recommendations
Observe the legislation in force in your country. Ensure that the weight of the towing vehicle is higher than that of the towed vehicle. The driver must remain at the wheel of the towed vehicle and must have a valid driving licence. When towing a vehicle with all four wheels on the ground, always use an approved towing arm; rope and straps are prohibited. The towing vehicle must move off gently. When towing a vehicle with the engine off, there is no longer any power assistance for braking or steering. In the following cases, you must always call on a professional recovery service: - vehicle broken down on a motorway or fast road, - four-wheel drive vehicle, - when it is not possible to put the gearbox into neutral, unlock the steering, or release
the parking brake, - towing with only two wheels on the ground, - where there is no approved towing arm available...
For more information on the Electric parking brake and in particular, parking the vehicle with the brake released, refer to the corresponding section.
8
273
In the event of a breakdown
Running out of fuel (Diesel)
On vehicles fitted with Diesel engines, the fuel system must be primed if you run out of fuel. For all versions other than BlueHDi, refer to the corresponding engine compartment view.
1.6 HDi engine
For more information on Diesel misfuel prevention, refer to the corresponding section.
If the engine does not start first time, don't keep trying but start the procedure again from the beginning.
(except BlueHDi) F Add at least 5 litres of Diesel to the fuel
tank. F Open the bonnet. F If necessary, unclip the styling cover for
access to the priming pump. F Squeeze and release the priming pump
repeatedly until resistance is felt (there may be resistance at the first press). F Operate the starter to start the engine (if the engine does not start at the first attempt, wait around 15 seconds before trying again). F If the engine does not start after a few attempts, operate the priming pump again then start the engine. F Refit the styling cover and clip it in place. F Close the bonnet.
BlueHDi engine
F Add at least 5 litres of Diesel to the fuel tank.
F Switch on the ignition (without starting the engine).
F Wait around 6 seconds and switch off the ignition.
F Repeat the operation 10 times. F Operate the starter to run the engine.
274
Technical data
Petrol engines and gearboxes
Engine
1.2 litre PureTech
82
1.2 litre PureTech 110
1.2 litre PureTech 130 S&S
Gearbox
Manual (5-speed)
Manual (5-speed)
Manual (6-speed)
EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Model code Body style Cubic capacity (cc) Bore x stroke (mm) Max power: EU standard (kW)* Max power engine speed (rpm) Max torque: EU standard (Nm) Max torque engine speed (rpm) Fuel Catalytic converter Oil capaciy (in litres) Engine (with replacement of the filter cartridge)
LPHMZ Hatchback
1 199 75 x 90.5
60 5 750 118 2 750 Unleaded yes
LPHNZ - LRHNZ
Hatchback
SW
1 199
75 x 90.5
81
5 500
205
1 500
Unleaded
yes
3.25
3.5
LPHNY - LRHNY
LPHNY - LRHNY
Hatchback
SW
Hatchback
SW
1 199
75 x 90.5
96
5 500
230
1 750
Unleaded
yes
3.5
9
* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under conditions defined by European legislation (directive 1999/99/EC).
275
Technical data
Engine
Gearbox
Model code Body style Cubic capacity (cc) Bore x stroke (mm) Max power: EU standard (kW)* Max power engine speed (rpm) Max torque: EU standard (Nm) Max torque engine speed (rpm) Fuel Catalytic converter Oil capacity (in litres) Engine (with replacement of the filter cartridge)
1.6 litre VTi 115
Manual (5-speed)
LWNFP - LXNFP
Hatchback
SW
1 587
78.5 x 82
85 / 115
6 050
150
4 000
Unleaded
yes
3.5
1.6 litre THP 135** / 150*** / 165***
EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
L35GL / L35GX / L35GY - L45GL / L45GX / L45GY
Hatchback
SW
1 598
77 x 85.8
99.3 / 110 / 121.4
6 000
221 / 240 / 240
1 400
Unleaded
yes
4.25
* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under conditions defined by European legislation (directive 1999/99/EC).
** For Russia. *** Outside Europe.
276
GT and GTi petrol engines and gearboxes
Technical data
Engine
1.6 litre THP 205 S&S GT
1.6 litre THP 250 / 270 S&S GTi
Gearbox
Model code Body style Cubic capacity (cc) Bore x stroke (mm) Max power: EU standard (kW)* Max power engine speed (rpm) Max torque: EU standard (Nm) Max torque engine speed (rpm) Fuel Catalytic converter Oil capacity (in litres) Engine (with replacement of the filter cartridge)
Manual (6-speed)
L35GT - L45GT
Hatchback
SW
1 598
77 x 85.8
151
6 000
285
1 750
Unleaded
yes
4.25
Manual (6-speed)
L35GP / L35GN Hatchback 1 598 77 x 85.8 184 / 200 6 000 330 1 900 Unleaded yes
4.25
9
* The maximum power corresponds to the type approved value on a test bed, under conditions defined by European legislation (directive 1999/99/EC)
277
Technical data
Petrol weights and towed loads (in kg)
Engine
1.2 litre PureTech
82
1.2 litre PureTech 110
1.2 litre PureTech 130 S&S
Gearbox
Manual (5-speed)
Manual (5-speed)
Manual (6-speed)
EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Model code Body style Unladen weight Kerb weight*
Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
Gross train weight (GTW) on a 12 % gradient Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10 % or 12 % gradient Unbraked trailer Recommended nose weight
LPHMZ Hatchback
1 075 1 150
LPHNZ - LRHNZ
Hatchback
SW
1 080
1 190
1 155
1 265
1 670
1 720
1 825
2 395
2 920
2 925
750
1 200
1 100
575
575
630
75
75
71
LPHNY - LRHNY
Hatchback
SW
1 090
1 190
1 165
1 265
1 750
1 840
3 041
3 040
1 300 580 75
1 200 630 71
LPHNY - LRHNY
Hatchback
SW
1 150
1 200
1 225
1 275
1 770
1 855
2 970
2 955
1 200 610
-
1 100 635
-
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) when towing (comply with the legislation in force in your country). High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg). 278
Technical data
Engine
Gearbox
Model code
Body style Unladen weight Kerb weight*
Gross vehicle weight (GVW) Gross train weight (GTW) on a 12 % gradient Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10 % or 12 % gradient Unbraked trailer Recommended nose weight
1.6 litre VTi 115
Manual (5-speed)
LWNFP - LXNFP
Hatchback
SW
1 190 1 265
1 260 1 335
1 720
1 820
2 320
2 420
600
600
600
600
75
71
1.6 litre THP 135** / 150*** / 165***
EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
L35GL / L35GX / L35GY - L45GL / L45GX / L45GY
Hatchback
SW
1 255 1 330
1 315 1 390
1 780
1 870
2 380
2 470
600
600
600
600
75
71
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) when towing (comply with the legislation in force in your country). High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg). ** For Russia. *** Outside Europe.
9
279
Technical data
Petrol GT and GTi weights and towed loads (in kg)
Engine Gearbox
1.6 litre THP 205 S&S GT
Manual (6-speed)
1.6 litre THP 250 / 270 S&S GTi
Manual (6-speed)
Model code
L35GT - L45GT
L35GP / L35GN
Body style
Unladen weight Kerb weight*
Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
Gross train weight (GTW) on a 12 % gradient Braked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10 % or 12 % gradient Unbraked trailer Recommended nose weight
Hatchback 1 200 1 275 1 790
3 190
1 400 635 75
SW 1 315 1 390 1 880
3 180
1 300 695 71
Hatchback 1 205 1 280 1 790
-
-
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) when towing (comply with the legislation in force in your country). High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg). 280
Technical data
Diesel engines and gearboxes
Engine
Gearbox
Model code
Body style Cubic capacity (cc) Bore x stroke (mm) Max power: EU standard (kW)* Max power engine speed (rpm) Max torque: EU standard (Nm) Max torque engine speed (rpm) Fuel Catalytic converter Particle filter Oil capacity (in litres) Engine (with replacement of the filter cartridge)
1.6 litre HDi 92 Manual (5-speed)
LB9HP - LC9HP
Hatchback
SW
68 4 000 230
1.6 litre e-HDi 115 Manual (6-speed)
LB9HC - LC9HC
Hatchback
SW
1 560 75 x 88.3
85
3 600 270
1 750 Diesel
yes
yes
3.75
1.6 litre BlueHDi 100 Manual (5-speed)
LBBHY - LCBHY
Hatchback
SW
73 3 750 254
9
* The maximum power corresponds to the value type approved on a test bed, under conditions defined by European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC).
281
Technical data
Engine Gearbox
Manual (6-speed)
1.6 litre BlueHDi 120 EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Model code
LBBHZ - LBBHX - LCBHZ - LCBHX
LBBHT - LBBHX - LCBHT - LCBHX
Body style Cubic capacity (cc) Bore x stroke (mm) Max power: EU standard (kW)* Max power engine speed (rpm) Max torque: EU standard (Nm) Max torque engine speed (rpm) Fuel Catalytic converter Particle filter Oil capacity (in litres) Engine (with replacement of the filter cartridge)
Hatchback
SW
Hatchback
SW
1 560
75 x 88.3
85** / 88
85
3 500 300
1 750 Diesel
yes
yes
3.75
* The maximum power corresponds to the value type approved on a test bed, under conditions defined by European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC).
** For Belgium.
282
Technical data
Engine Gearbox Model code Body style Cubic capacity (cc) Bore x stroke (mm) Max power: EU standard (kW)* Max power engine speed (rpm) Max torque: EU standard (Nm) Max torque engine speed (rpm) Fuel Catalytic converter Particle filter Oil capacity (in litres) Engine (with replacement of the filter cartridge)
2.0 litre BlueHDi 150
Manual (6-speed)
EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
LHAHX - LJAHX - LJAHR
LHAHX - LJAHX
Hatchback
SW
Hatchback
SW
1 997 85 x 88
110
3 750 370 2 000
Diesel yes
yes
6.1
* The maximum power corresponds to the value type approved on a test bed, under conditions defined by European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC).
9
283
Technical data
Diesel GT engines and gearboxes
Engine Gearbox
2.0 litre BlueHDi 180 GT
EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Model code
LHAHT - LHAHW - LJAHT - LJAHW
Body style Cubic capacity (cc) Bore x stroke (mm) Max power: EU standard (kW)* Max power engine speed (rpm) Max torque: EU standard (Nm) Max torque engine speed (rpm) Fuel Catalytic converter Particle filter Oil capacity (in litres) Engine (with replacement of the filter cartridge)
Hatchback
SW
1 997 85 x 88
133
3 750 400
2 000 Diesel
yes
yes
5.1
* The maximum power corresponds to the value type approved on a test bed, under conditions defined by European legislation (Directive 1999/99/EC).
284
Technical data
Diesel weights and towed loads (in kg)
Engine
1.6 litre HDi 92
1.6 litre e-HDi 115
1.6 litre BlueHDi 100
Gearbox
Manual (5-speed)
Manual (6-speed)
Manual (5-speed)
Model code Body style Unladen weight Kerb weight*
LB9HP - LC9HP
Hatchback
SW
1 090 1 165
1 180 1 255
LB9HC - LC9HC
Hatchback
SW
1 160 1 237
1 200 1 275
LBBHY - LCBHY
Hatchback
SW
1 160 1 235
1 200 1 275
Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
1 740
1 850
1 780
1 870
1 780
1 880
Gross train weight (GTW) on a 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer
Recommended nose weight
3 040
1 300 580 75
3 050
1 200 620 71
3 180
1 400 615 75
3 170
1 300 630 71
3 074
1 300 615 75
3 080
1 200 630 71
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) when towing (comply with the legislation in force in your country). High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
9
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg). 285
Technical data
Engine Gearbox Model code Body style Unladen weight Kerb weight*
1.6 litre BlueHDi 120
Manual (6-speed)
EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
LBBHZ - LBBHX - LCBHZ - LCBHX
LBBHT - LBBHX - LCBHT - LCBHX
Hatchback 1 185 1 260
SW 1 300 1 375
Hatchback 1 200 1 275
SW 1 310 1 385
Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
1 810
1 870
1 820
1 910
Gross train weight (GTW) on a 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10% or 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer
Recommended nose weight
3 210
1 400 615 75
3 170
1 300 680 71
3 120
1 300 635 75
3 110
1 200 690 71
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) when towing (comply with the legislation in force in your country). High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg). 286
Technical data
Engine
2.0 litre BlueHDi 150
Gearbox
Manual (6-speed)
EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Model code
LHAHX - LJAHX - LJAHR
LHAHX - LJAHX
Body style Unladen weight Kerb weight*
Hatchback 1 290 1 365
SW 1 315 1 390
Hatchback 1 310 1 385
SW 1 420 1 495
Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
1 870
1 970
1 900
2 000
Gross train weight (GTW) on a 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10% or 12% gradient
3 465 1 600
3 470 1 500
3 398 1 500
3 400 1 400
Unbraked trailer
680
690
690
740
Recommended nose weight
75
71
75
71
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) when towing (comply with the legislation in force in your country). High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
9
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg). 287
Technical data
Diesel GT weights and towed loads (in kg)
Engine Gearbox
2.0 litre BlueHDi 180 GT
EAT6 automatic (6-speed)
Model code
LHAHT - LHAHW - LJAHT - LJAHW
Body style Unladen weight Kerb weight*
Hatchback 1 320 1 395
SW 1 425 1 500
Gross vehicle weight (GVW)
1 920
2 020
Gross train weight (GTW) on a 12% gradient
Unbraked trailer (within GTW limit) on a 10% or 12% gradient
3 420 1 500
3 420 1 400
Unbraked trailer
695
750
Recommended nose weight
75
71
The GTW and towed load values indicated are valid up to a maximum altitude of 1 000 metres; the towed load mentioned must be reduced by 10 % for each additional 1 000 metres of altitude. Do not exceed 60 mph (100 km/h) when towing (comply with the legislation in force in your country). High ambient temperatures may result in a reduction in the performance of the vehicle to protect the engine; if the ambient temperature is above 37 °C, limit the towed load.
* The kerb weight is equal to the unladen weight + driver (75 kg). 288
Dimensions (in mm)
These dimensions have been measured on an unladen vehicle.
Hatchback
Technical data
SW
9
289
Technical data
GT / GTi hatchback*
SW GT
290
Affaire version
Number of seats: 2 persons. Useable boot volume: 1.31 m3
Load floor length Load width at the wheel arches Load width at the centre Load height - at the centre - at the load aperture - below the luggage cover
In metres (m) 1.458 1.036 1.077
0.916 0.831
0.5
Technical data
9
291
Technical data
Identification markings
Various visible markings for the identification of your vehicle.
D. Tyre/paint label. This label on the middle door pillar, driver's
side, contains the following information: - the tyre inflation pressures, laden and
unladen, - the tyre sizes (including the tyre load
index and speed rating), - the inflation pressure for the spare
wheel, - the paint colour code.
A. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) under the bonnet.
This number is engraved on the chassis near the right-hand front wheel arch.
B. Vehicle Identification Number (VIN) on the windscreen lower cross member.
This number is indicated on a selfadhesive label which is visible through the windscreen.
C. Manufacturer's label.
This self-destroying label on the middle
door pillar, right or left-hand side, contains
the following information: - the manufacturer's name, - the European whole vehicle type
approval number, - the vehicle identification number (VIN), - the maximum authorised weight (gross
vehicle weight), - the maximum authorised weight with
trailer (gross train weight), - the maximum front axle weight, - the maximum rear axle weight.
292
The tyre pressures must be checked when the tyres are cold, at least once a month.
If the tyre pressures are too low, this increases fuel consumption.
DENON equipment
The new DENON Hi-Fi system in the PEUGEOT 308 is a tailored technological solution comprising 9 speakers and a digital amplifier.
The DENON technology offers efficient components providing high performance: - 4 flexible membrane tweeters with
resonance chamber to minimise audio distortion. 100% active at the front of the vehicle. - 4 CosConeTM woofers: a technology allowing a high level of sensitivity and speaker cone travel, generating high bass performance despite a very flat form. - 1 sub-woofer with a 100W speaker installed under the boot floor, without affecting the load volume of the boot. - 1 Class-D 8-way digital amplifier. Improved control of running noises. 2 audio distribution settings available to suit the number of occupants in the vehicle (driver or passengers). - "Digital Coloration" technology giving the engine a more sporty and refined sound.
Audio and Telematics
.
293
7-inch touch screen
GPS satellite navigation - Multimedia audio - Bluetooth® telephone
Audio and Telematics
Contents
First steps
296
Steering mounted controls
299
Menus
300
Media
302
Radio
308
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 310
Music
312
Navigation
316
Navigation - Guidance
324
Traffic
328
Configuration
330
Connected services
340
PEUGEOT Connect Apps
341
Telephone
342
Frequently asked questions
350
The system is protected in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle.
As a safety measure, the driver should only carry out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary. The display of an energy economy mode message signals that electrical systems operating are going into standby. Refer to the energy economy mode section.
.
295
Audio and Telematics
First steps
Use the buttons on either side of the touch screen for access to the menus, then press the virtual buttons in the touch screen. Each menu is displayed in one or two pages (primary page and secondary page).
Primary page
In very hot conditions, the system may go into stand-by (screen and sound completely off) for a minimum period of 5 minutes.
Secondary page
296
Audio and Telematics
Shortcuts: using virtual buttons in the top band of the touch screen, it is possible to go directly to the choice of audio source, the list of stations (or titles depending on the source) or to the temperature adjustment.
Selecting the audio source (depending on version): - "FM" / "AM" / "DAB"* radio wavebands. - "USB" memory stick. - CD player (located in the glove box)*. -Telephone connected by Bluetooth* and by
Bluetooth* audio streaming. - Media player connected to the auxiliary
socket (jack, cable not supplied).
* Depending on equipment.
With the engine running, press to mute the sound. With the ignition off, press to switch the system on.
Volume adjustment (each source is independent, including Traffic announcements (TA) and navigation instructions).
In very hot conditions, the volume may be limited to protect the system. The return to normal takes place when the temperature in the passenger compartment drops.
The screen is of the "resistive" type, it is necessary to press firmly, particularly for "flick" gestures (scrolling through a list, moving the map...). A simple swipe will not be enough. Pressing with more than one finger is not recognised. The screen can be used when wearing gloves. This technology allows use at all temperatures.
To clean the screen, use a soft non-abrasive cloth (spectacles cloth) without any additional product. Do not use pointed objects on the screen. Do not touch the screen with wet hands.
.
297
Steering mounted controls
Audio and Telematics
Press: mute on / off. Increase volume. Decrease volume. Change audio source: radio, media.
Radio, rotate: automatic search for the previous / next station. Radio, press: preset stations. Media, rotate: previous / next track. Press: confirm a selection.
Telephone: start or answer a call. Call in progress: telephone menu (end call, secret mode, hands-free mode). Telephone, press and hold: reject an incoming call, end a call in progress; other than call in progress, telephone menu. Radio: display the list of stations. Media: display the list of tracks. Radio, press and hold: update the list of stations received.
.
299
Audio and Telematics
Menus
Air conditioning
Driving assistance
Media
Control of the settings for temperature and air flow.
Access to the trip computer. Activate, deactivate, adjust settings for certain vehicle functions.
Select an audio source, a radio station, display photographs.
Navigation
(Depending on equipment)
Enter navigation settings and choose a destination.
300
Configuration
Connected services
(Depending on equipment)
Audio and Telematics
Telephone
Adjust settings for audio (balance, ambience, ...), colour scheme, brightness of the instruments and controls, display (language, units, date, time, ...) and access the interactive help for the vehicle's main systems and warning lamps.
PEUGEOT CONNECT APPS Connect to an applications portal to facilitate, make safe and personalise journeys by means of a connection key available on subscription from a PEUGEOT dealer.
Connect a telephone by Bluetooth®.
.
301
Audio and Telematics
Media
Level 1
"Media"
Primary page
Level 2 List of FM stations
Save 302
Level 1 Media List
Media Source
Media Save
Level 2
List of FM stations
FM Radio DAB Radio AM Radio CD USB iPod Bluetooth AUX
Audio and Telematics Comments Press on a radio station to select it.
Select change of source.
Press on an empty location then on "Save".
.
303
Audio and Telematics Level 1
"Media"
Secondary page
Media
Level 2 List of FM stations
Photos
Level 3
304
Level 1 Media
Secondary page Radio list
Media Secondary page
Photos
Level 2 Save Update list Frequency Confirm Page selection Rotate Select all
Slideshow
Confirm
Level 3
Previous photo. Pause / Play. Next photo.
Audio and Telematics
Comments Press on a radio station to select it. Update the list of stations received. Enter the desired radio frequency. Save the settings. Display the selected photo full screen. Rotate the photo 90°. Select all the photos in the list. Press again to deselect.
Display the photos in sequence, full screen.
Save the settings.
.
305
Audio and Telematics Level 1
"Media"
Secondary page Media
306
Level 2 Settings
Level 3
Settings Settings
Level 1 Media
Secondary page Media list
Media Secondary page
Settings
Level 2
Media Settings
Radio Settings
Announcements Settings Confirm
Level 3
Audio and Telematics Comments Presentation of the last media used.
Shuffle (all tracks)
Shuffle (current album) Choose the play settings.
Repeat
Aux. amplification
RDS options
DAB/FM station tracking
Display Radio Text
Activate or deactivate the options.
Digital radio slideshow display
Traffic announcements (TA)
Weather Sport - Programme info
Activate or deactivate the options.
Alert settings
Save the settings.
.
307
Audio and Telematics
Radio
Selecting a station
Press on Media to display the primary page.
or Press on Media to display the primary page then go to the secondary page.
Select "List" in the primary page.
OR
Press on Media to display the primary page then select "Save".
Select a preset radio station in the list.
If necessary, select change of source.
or
Select "Radio list" in the secondary page.
Select "FM Radio" or "AM Radio".
Select a radio station from the list offered.
Select "Update list" to refresh the list.
The exterior environment (hills, buildings, tunnel, car park, below ground...) may prevent reception, even in RDS station tracking mode. This phenomenon is normal in the propagation of radio waves and is in no way indicative of a fault with the audio system.
308
Changing a radio frequency
Press on Media to display the primary page.
By automatic frequency search
Press 3 or 4 to move the cursor for an automatic search down or up for a radio frequency.
OR
Press on Media to display the primary page then press on the secondary page.
Press on "Enter frequency" to display the primary page then press on the secondary page.
Audio and Telematics
THEN
Select the change of source.
Preset a station
Select a radio station or frequency (refer to the corresponding section).
Press on "Save".
Activate/ Deactivate RDS
Press on Media to display the primary page then go to the secondary page.
Select "FM Radio" or "AM Radio".
OR
Enter the frequency in full (e.g.: 92.10 MHz) using the keypad then "Confirm".
By alphabetical list
Press the current radio band then choose the radio station from the list offered.
Select a number in the list to preset the previously chosen radio station. A long press on a number presets (memorises) the station.
Or
A press on this button presets all of the stations one after the other.
Recall preset stations
Press on Media to display the primary page then select "Save".
Select "Settings".
Select "Radio".
Activate/deactivate "RDS options".
RDS, if activated, allows you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the entire country as radio stations do not cover 100% of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of the station during a journey.
.
309
Audio and Telematics
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio
Display of the name of the current station.
Short-cut: access to the choice of audio source, the list of stations (or titles depending on the source) or temperature adjustment.
Select the radio station.
Any thumbnail broadcast by the station.
Select the audio source. Display the "DAB" band.
Secondary page.
Previous "Multiplex". Previous radio station.
Display the name and number of the multiplex service being used.
Display of options: if active but not available, the display will be greyed out, if active and available, the display will be blank.
Display of "Radiotext" for the current station.
Next "Multiplex". Next radio station.
Preset stations, buttons 1 to 15. Short press: select the preset radio station. Long press: preset a radio station.
If the "DAB" radio station being listened to is not available on "FM", the "DAB FM" option is greyed out.
Journaline® is a text-based information service designed for digital radio systems. It provides text-based information structured around topics and sub-topics. This service is available from the "LIST OF DAB STATIONS" page.
310
Audio and Telematics
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) Digital radio
Digital radio provides higher quality reception and also the graphical display of current information on the radio station being listened to. Select "List" in the primary page. The range of multiplexes available is displayed in alphabetical order.
Digital radio - DAB / FM auto tracking
"DAB" does not cover 100% of the territory. When the digital radio signal is weak, "DAB/FM station tracking" allows you to continue listening to the same station, by automatically switching to the corresponding "FM" analogue station (if there is one).
Press on Media to display the primary page.
Select change of source.
Press Media to display the primary page then press on the secondary page.
Select "DAB Radio".
Select "List" in the primary page.
or Select "Radio list" in the secondary page.
Select the radio station from the list offered.
Select "Settings".
Select "Radio".
Select "Digital/FM auto tracking" then "Confirm".
If "DAB/FM station tracking" is activated, there is a difference of a few seconds when the system switches to "FM" analogue radio with sometimes a variation in volume. When the digital signal is restored, the system automatically changes back to "DAB".
If the "DAB" station being listened to is not available on "FM" ("DAB/FM" option greyed out), or "DAB/FM station tracking" is not activated, the sound will cut out while the digital signal is too weak.
.
311
Audio and Telematics
Music
USB player
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
Selecting the source
Press on Media to display the primary page.
Select change of source.
Insert the USB memory stick into the USB port or connect the USB device to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied).
To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.
The system builds playlists (in temporary memory), an operation which can take from a few seconds to several minutes at the first connection. Reduce the number of non-music files and the number of folders to reduce the waiting time. The playlists are updated every time the ignition is switched off or on connection of a USB memory stick. The lists are memorised: if they are not modified, the subsequent loading time will be shorter.
This source is only available if the "Auxiliary socket" option has been activated in the "Media" settings.
Connect the portable device (MP3 player...) to the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable (not supplied).
First adjust the volume of your portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume of your audio system. Display and management of the controls are via the portable device.
CD player
Insert the CD in the player.
Choose the source.
The steering mounted SRC (source) button can be used to go to the next media source, available if the source is active.
Press OK to confirm the selection.
312
Audio and Telematics
Information and advice
The audio system will only play audio files with ".wma, .aac, .flac, .ogg and .mp3" file extensions and with a bit rate of between 32 Kbps and 320 Kbps. It also supports VBR (Variable Bit Rate) mode. No other type of file (.mp4, etc.) can be played. ".wma" files must be of the standard wma 9 type. The sampling rates supported are 32, 44 and 48 KHz.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording it is preferable to select the ISO 9660 level 1, 2 or Joliet standard. If the disc is recorded in another format it may not be played correctly. It is recommended that the same recording standard is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality. In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet standard is recommended.
Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT 32 (file allocation table).
To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.
It is recommended that the USB cable for the portable device is used.
It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters, without using of special characters (e.g. " " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing and displaying problems.
The system supports USB mass storage devices, BlackBerry® devices or Apple® players via USB ports. The adaptor cable is not supplied. Control of the peripheral device is with the audio system controls. Other peripherals, not recognised on connection, must be connected to the auxiliary socket using a Jack cable (not supplied).
.
313
Audio and Telematics
Bluetooth® audio streaming
Streaming allows audio files on your telephone to be played through the vehicle's speakers.
Connecting Apple® players
Connect the telephone: see the "Telephone" section, then "Bluetooth". Choose the "Audio" or "All" profile.
If play does not start automatically, it may be necessary to start the audio playback from the telephone. Control is from the peripheral device or by using the audio system buttons.
Once connected in streaming mode, the telephone is considered to be a media source. It is recommended that you activate "Repeat" on the Bluetooth peripheral.
Connect the Apple® player to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifications available are those of the portable device connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks / podcasts). The default classification used is by artist. To modify the classification used, return to the first level of the menu then select the desired classification (playlists for example) and confirm to go down through the menu to the desired track.
The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of your Apple® player.
314
Audio and Telematics
Navigation
Level 1
"Navigation"
Primary page
Level 2 Navigation
Level 3 Route settings
316
Level 1
Level 2 Enter destination
Navigation
Settings Navigation
Route settings
Save Stop navigation Voice Diversion
Navigation
Level 3
Fastest Shortest Time/distance Ecological Tolls Ferries Strict-Close Show route on map Confirm
Audio and Telematics
Comments Display recent destinations.
Choose the navigation criteria. The map displays the route chosen according to these criteria.
Display the map and start navigation. Save the options. Save the current address. Delete the navigation information. Choose the volume for voice and announcement of street names. Detour from your initial route by a certain distance. Display in text mode Zoom in. Zoom out.
Display in full screen mode. Use the arrows to move the map.
Switch to 2D map.
.
317
Audio and Telematics Level 1
"Navigation"
Secondary page Navigation
318
Level 2 Enter destination
Level 3 Address
For managing contacts and their addresses, refer to the "Telephone" section.
Contacts
To use the telephone functions, refer to the "Telephone" section.
Level 1
Level 2 Address
Navigation Secondary page Enter destination
Contacts
On the map
Itinerary Stop Navigate to
Level 3 Current loc. Point of interest Town center Save Add waypoint Navigate to Addresses Add contact Add waypoint Search for contact Navigate to
Audio and Telematics Comments Address settings Save the current address. Add a waypoint to the route. Press to calculate the route.
Select a contact then calculate the route.
Display the map and zoom to view the roads.
Create, add or delete a waypoint or view the itinerary. Delete navigation information. Press to calculate the route.
.
319
Audio and Telematics Level 1
"Navigation"
Secondary page
Navigation
Level 2
Level 3
Search for a point of interest
Search for a POI by name
Point of interest displayed on the map
320
Level 1
Navigation Secondary page Search for POI
Navigation Secondary page
Show POIs
Level 2 All POIs Motor Dining/hotels Personal By name Search Select all Delete Import POIs Confirm
Level 3
Audio and Telematics Comments
List of categories available. After choosing the category, select the points of interest.
Save the settings.
Choose the display settings for POIs.
Save the options.
.
321
Audio and Telematics Level 1
"Navigation"
Secondary page Navigation
322
Level 2 Traffic messages
Map settings Settings
Level 3 Diversion
Map settings
Settings
Settings
Moving between the two menus.
Level 1 Navigation
Secondary page Traffic messages
Navigation Secondary page
Map settings
Navigation Secondary page
Settings
Level 2 On the route Around vehicle Near destination Detour Finish
Orientation
Maps
Aspect
Confirm Route settings Voice Alarm! Traffic options Confirm
Level 3
Audio and Telematics Comments
Detour over a distance Recalculate route
Flat view north heading Flat view vehicle heading Perspective view
"Day" map colour "Night" map colour Automatic day/night
Settings for the choice of messages and the filter radius. Save your selections.
Choose the display and orientation of the map.
Save the settings.
Enter settings and choose the volume for the voice and announcement of street names.
Save your selections.
.
323
Audio and Telematics
Navigation - Guidance
Choosing a new destination
Towards a new destination
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Address".
Select the "Country:" from the list offered, then in the same way the "City:" or its post code, the "Road:", the "N°:". Confirm each time.
Select "Save" to save the address entered as a contact entry. The system allows up to 200 entries.
Select "Navigate to".
Choose the navigation criteria: "Fastest" or "Shortest" or "Time/ distance" or "Ecological".
Choose the restriction criteria: "Tolls", "Ferries", "Traffic", "Strict", "Close". Select "Confirm".
Or
Press on "Show route on map" to start navigation.
324
To delete navigation information, press on "Settings".
Press on "Stop navigation".
To resume navigation press on "Settings". Press on "Resume guidance".
Audio and Telematics
Towards a recent destination
Press on Navigation to display the primary page. Press on the secondary page.
Select "Enter destination".
Select an address from the list offered.
Towards a contact
To be able to use navigation "towards a contact in the directory", it is first necessary to enter the address for your contact.
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Enter destination".
Select "Navigate to".
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or press "Show route on map" to start navigation.
Select "Contacts".
Select a destination from the contacts in the list offered. Select "Navigate to". Select the criteria then "Confirm" to start navigation.
.
325
Audio and Telematics
Towards GPS coordinates
Press on Navigation to display the primary page. Press on the secondary page.
Select "Enter destination".
Towards a point on the map
Press on Navigation to display the primary page. Press on the secondary page.
Select "Enter destination".
Towards points of interest (POI)
Points of Interest (POI) are listed in different categories.
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Address".
Select "On the map".
Select "Search for POI".
Enter the "Longitude:" then the "Latitude:".
Select "Navigate to".
Zooming in on the map shows points with information.
A long press on a point opens its content.
Select the criteria then "Confirm" or press "Show route on map" to start navigation.
Select "All POIs",
Or "Motor",
Or "Dining/hotels".
326
An annual mapping update allows new points of interest to be presented to you. You can also update the Risk areas / Danger areas every month. The detailed procedure is available on: http://peugeot.navigation.com.
Audio and Telematics
.
327
Audio and Telematics
Risk areas / Danger zone alert settings
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Settings".
Select "Alarm!" (Alert).
It is then possible to activate Risk areas alerts then: - "Audible warning" - "Alert only when navigating" - "Alert only for overspeed" - "Display speed limits" -Timing: the choice of timing allows the
time before giving a Risk areas alert to be defined.
Select "Confirm".
328
This series of alerts and displays is only available if Risk areas have first been downloaded and installed on the system.
Traffic
Traffic information
Display of messages
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Traffic messages".
Choose filter settings for: "On the route",
"Around",
"Near destination", filters to finetune the list of messages. Press again to remove the filter.
Audio and Telematics
Select the message from the list offered.
Setting filters
Press on Navigation to display the primary page.
Select the magnifying glass to have voice information.
Press on the secondary page. Select "Settings".
Receiving TA messages
Press on Navigation to display the primary page. Press on the secondary page.
Select "Settings".
TMC (Traffic Message Channel) messages on GPS-Navigation contain traffic information transmitted in real time.
Select "Traffic options".
Select: - "Be advised of new messages", - "Speak messages". Then enter the filter radius.
Select "Confirm".
We recommend a filter radius of: - 12 miles (20 km) in urban areas, - 30 miles (50 km) on motorways.
Select "Voice".
Activate / Deactivate "Traffic (TA)".
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic report is transmitted, the current audio source is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.
.
329
Audio and Telematics
Configuration
Level 1
"Configuration"
Primary page
Level 2 Audio settings
Choice of colors
Level 3 Audio settings
Audio settings
330
Level 1
Configuration Audio settings
Configuration Turn off screen Configuration Color schemes
Configuration Interactive help
Level 2 Ambience Balance Sound effects Ringtones Voice Confirm
Confirm
Go back Driving assistance Equipment Warning lamps Audio communication GPS Navigation Previous page Next page
Level 3
Audio and Telematics
Comments Choose the sound ambience. Set the position of the sound in the vehicle using the Arkamys® system. Choose the volume or activate the link to vehicle speed. Choose the telephone ringtone and volume. Choose the volume for the voice and announcement of street names. Save the settings.
Turns off the display (black screen). Pressing the black screen restores the display.
After choosing the color scheme, save the setting.
Consult the Interactive help.
.
331
Audio and Telematics Level 1
"Configuration"
Secondary page
Configuration
Level 2 Units
Adjust date and time
Display screen
332
Factory settings
Level 1
Configuration Secondary page System Settings
Configuration Secondary page
Time/Date
Configuration Secondary page Screen settings
Units
Level 2
Delete data
Factory settings
Confirm
Confirm
Activate automatic text scrolling Activate animations Confirm
Audio and Telematics Comments Set the units used to display distance, fuel consumption and temperature. Select the desired data in the list then press Delete. Return to factory settings. Save the settings.
Set the date and time then confirm.
Make the setting then confirm.
.
333
Audio and Telematics Level 1
"Configuration"
Secondary page
Configuration
Level 2 Choice of language
Calculator
Calendar
334
Level 1 Configuration Secondary page
Languages
Configuration Secondary page
Calculator
Configuration Secondary page
Calendar
Confirm
Level 2
Audio and Telematics Comments Select the language then confirm. Select the calculator. Select the calendar.
.
335
Audio and Telematics
Audio settings
Press on Configuration to display the primary page. Select "Audio settings". Select "Ambience" or "Balance" or "Sound effects" or "Ringtones" or "Voice".
336
The distribution (or spatialisation using the Arkamys© system) of sound is an audio process that allows the audio quality to be adapted to the number of listeners in the vehicle. Available only with the 6-speaker configuration.
The audio settings (Ambience, Bass:, Treble: and Loudness) are different and independent for each sound source. The settings for Distribution and Balance are common to all sources.
- "Ambience" (choice of 6 musical ambiences)
- "Bass:" - "Treble:" - "Loudness" (Activate/Deactivate) - "Balance" ("Driver", "All
passengers", "Front only") - "Audible response from touch
screen" - "Volume linked to speed"
(Activate/Deactivate)
On-board audio: Arkamys© Sound Staging optimises sound distribution in the passenger compartment.
Color schemes
Press on Configuration to display the primary page.
Select "Color schemes".
Interactive help
Press on Configuration to display the primary page.
Select "Interactive help".
Select the colour scheme in the list, then "Confirm".
At each change of colour scheme the system restarts, showing a black screen for a few moments.
As a safety measure, the procedure for changing the color scheme is only possible with the vehicle stationary.
The "Interactive help" included in the system is not intended to be a substitute for the more complete content of the printed handbook.
As a safety measure, consultation of the handbook is only possible with the vehicle stationary.
Audio and Telematics
.
337
Audio and Telematics
System
Modify system settings
Press on Configuration to display the primary page then go to the secondary page.
Select "System Settings".
Select "Units" to change the units of distance, fuel consumption and temperature. Select "Delete data" to delete the list of recent destinations, personal points of interest, contacts in the list. Choose the item then select "Delete".
Select "Factory settings" to return to the original settings.
338
Press on Configuration to display the primary page then go to the secondary page.
Select "Screen settings".
Activate or deactivate "Activate automatic text scrolling" and "Activate animations".
Press on Configuration to display the primary page then go to the secondary page.
Select: - "Time/Date" to change the time
zone, synchronisation with GPS, the time and its format and then the date. - "Languages" to change the language. - "Calculator" to display a calculator. - "Calendar" to display a calendar.
Audio and Telematics
Connected services
Level 1
"Connected services"
Primary page Driving assistance applications, see the "PEUGEOT Connect Apps"* section.
Secondary page Internet navigation via Bluetooth telephone Dial-Up Networking (DUN).
Level 2 Identification
DUN connection settings
Certain new generation smartphones are not compatible with this standard.
Transfer rate
* Depending on country. 340
Audio and Telematics
PEUGEOT Connect Apps
"PEUGEOT Connect Apps"* is a service providing driving aid applications in real time; it gives access to useful information such as the state of the traffic, danger zones, fuel prices, the availability of parking places, tourist sites, weather conditions, correct addresses... It includes access to the mobile network associated with the use of these applications. "PEUGEOT Connect Apps"* is a service available under subscription contract from PEUGEOT dealers, depending on country and the type of touch screen, both before and after delivery of a new vehicle.
Press on the "Connected services" menu to display the applications.
These applications use vehicle data such as the current speed, mileage, remaining fuel range or even GPS position to provide pertinent information.
The "MyPeugeot" application is a link between the user, the manufacturer and its dealer network. It allows the customer to know everything about their vehicle: servicing plan, accessory range, service contracts taken out, ... It also makes possible the sending of the vehicle's mileage to the "MyPeugeot" site, or to identify a dealer.
Plug the "PEUGEOT Connect Apps" connection key into the USB port.
* Depending on country.
As a safety measure, some functions can only be used when stationary.
.
341
Audio and Telematics
Telephone
Level 1
"Telephone"
Primary page
Level 2 Call log
Contacts 342
Level 3
Level 1
Telephone Call log
Level 2 All calls Incoming calls Outgoing calls Contacts
Magnifying glass
Call Addresses
Telephone Contacts
View
Navigate to Search for contact Call
Level 3
Audio and Telematics Comments
View Create
Create Modify Delete Delete all By name Confirm
After making choices, start the call. After making choices, start the call.
.
343
Audio and Telematics Level 1
"Telephone"
Secondary page
Telephone connection
Level 2 Bluetooth (equipment)
Devices detected
Telephone Options
344
Level 3
Level 1
Telephone connection Secondary page Bluetooth connection
Telephone connection Secondary page Search for
devices
Telephone connection Secondary page Telephone Options
Level 2 Search Disconnect Update Delete Confirm
Devices detected
Put on hold Update Ringtones Memory info. Confirm
Level 3
Telephone Audio streaming Internet
Audio and Telematics
Comments Start the search for another peripheral device to connect. Stop the Bluetooth connection to the selected peripheral device. Import the contacts from the selected telephone to store them in the audio system. Delete the selected telephone.
Save the settings.
Start the search for peripheral devices.
Cut the microphone temporarily so that the contact cannot hear your conversation with a passenger. Import the contacts from the selected telephone to save them in the audio system.
Choose the telephone ringtone and volume.
Contact records used and free, percentage of storage space used by internal contacts and Bluetooth contacts.
Save the settings.
.
345
Audio and Telematics
Pairing a Bluetooth® telephone
For reasons of safety and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing the Bluetooth mobile telephone to the hands-free system of the audio system must be carried out with the vehicle stationary.
Procedure from the system
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone configuration).
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Procedure (short) from the telephone
In the Bluetooth menu of your device, select the system name in the list of devices detected.
Enter a code of at least 4 figures in the device and confirm.
Enter this same code in the system, select "OK" and confirm.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth connection".
Select "Search for devices". The list of telephones detected is displayed.
If the telephone is not detected, it is recommended that you switch the Bluetooth function on your telephone off and then on again.
Select the name of the desired peripheral from the list and "Confirm".
Enter a code of at least 4 figures for the connection then "Confirm".
Enter this same code in the telephone then accept the connection.
The system offers to connect the telephone: - in "Telephone" (hands-free kit, telephone
only), - in "Audio streaming" (streaming: wireless
playing of audio files from the telephone), - in "Internet" (internet browsing, only if your
telephone is compatible with the "DUN" Dial-Up Networking Bluetooth standard). Select one or more profiles and confirm.
346
Audio and Telematics
The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth telephone used. Check the telephone manual and with your network provider for details of the services available to you.
Depending on the type of telephone, the system will ask you to accept or not the transfer of your contacts.
If not, select "Update".
The ability of the system to connect with only one profile depends on the telephone. The three profiles may all connect by default.
Visit www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, additional help, ...).
The recognised telephone appears in the list.
On return to the vehicle, if the last telephone connected is present again, it is reconnected automatically and within around 30 seconds after switching on the ignition the pairing is done without any action on your part, with (Bluetooth activated). To modify the automatic connection mode, select the telephone in the list then select the desired profile.
Depending on your telephone, you may be asked to accept automatic connection every time the ignition is switched on.
Connecting a Bluetooth® peripheral device
Automatic reconnection
On switching on the ignition, the telephone connected when the ignition was last switched off is automatically reconnected, if this connection mode had been activated during the pairing procedure. The connection is confirmed by the display of a message and the name of the telephone.
Manual connection
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth" to display the list of paired peripherals.
Select the peripheral to connect. Press on "Search for devices".
The connection is confirmed by the display of a message and the name of the telephone.
.
347
Audio and Telematics
Managing paired telephones
This function allows the connection or disconnection of a peripheral device as well as the deletion of a pairing.
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Press on the secondary page.
Select "Bluetooth" to display the list of paired peripheral devices.
Select the peripheral in the list. Select "Search for devices"
Or "Connect / Disconnect" to start or end the Bluetooth connection with the selected device.
Or "Delete" to delete the pairing.
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen.
Make a short press on the steering mounted TEL button to accept an incoming call. Make a long press
on the steering mounted TEL button to reject the call.
Or Select "End call".
Making a call
Using the telephone is not recommended while driving. Park the vehicle. Make the call using the steering mounted controls.
Calling a new number
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Enter the phone number using the digital keypad. Press "Call" to start the call.
Calling a contact
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Or make a long press
on the steering mounted TEL button.
348
Managing contacts / entries
Select "Contacts".
Select the desired contact from the list offered. Select "Call".
Calling a recently used number
Press on Telephone to display the primary page.
Or Select "Call log".
Press on Telephone to display the primary page. Select "Contacts". Select "View". Select "Create" to add a new contact.
"Modify" to edit the selected contact.
Or Select the desired contact from the list offered.
It is always possible to make a call
directly from the telephone; park the vehicle first as a safety measure.
Or
"Delete" to delete the selected contact.
"Delete all" to delete all information for the selected contact.
Audio and Telematics Select "By name" to view the list of contacts.
.
349
Audio and Telematics
Frequently asked questions
The following table groups together the answers to the most frequently asked questions concerning your audio system.
Navigation
QUESTION
ANSWER
SOLUTION
The route calculation is not The route settings may conflict with the current location (exclusion of Check the route settings in the "Navigation"
successful.
toll roads on a toll motorway).
menu.
The POIs do not appear. The POIs have not been selected.
Select the POIs in the list of POIs.
The Risk areas audible warning does not work.
The audible warning is not active.
The system does not
The guidance criteria do not take account of TMC messages.
suggest a detour around an
incident on the route.
Activate audible warnings in the "Navigation" menu.
Select the "Information" function in the list of route settings.
I receive a Risk areas alert which is not on my route.
Other than guidance, the system announces all Risk areas positioned in a cone located in front of the vehicle. It may provide an alert for Risk areas located on nearby or parallel roads.
Zoom in on the map to view the exact position of the Risk areas. Select "On the route" to no longer receive alerts other than navigation instructions or to reduce the time for the announcement.
350
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
Certain traffic jams along the route are not indicated in real time.
ANSWER
SOLUTION
On starting, it is several minutes before the system begins to receive Wait until the traffic information is being received
the traffic information.
correctly (display of the traffic information icons
on the map).
The filters are too restrictive.
Modify the settings.
The altitude is not displayed.
In certain countries, only major routes (motorways...) are listed for the traffic information.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the traffic information available.
On starting, the initialisation of the GPS may take up to 3 minutes to Wait until the system has started up completely so
receive more than 4 satellites correctly.
that there is GPS coverage by at least 4 satellites.
Depending on the geographical environment (tunnel...) or the weather, the conditions of reception of the GPS signal may vary.
This phenomenon is normal. The system is dependent on the GPS signal reception conditions.
.
351
Audio and Telematics
Radio
QUESTION
The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
ANSWER The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks...) block reception, including in RDS mode.
SOLUTION Activate the "RDS" function by means of the short-cut menu to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.
This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate a fault with the audio system.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer. through a car wash or into an underground car park).
I cannot find some radio stations in the list of stations received.
The name of the radio station changes.
The station is not received or its name has changed in the list.
Some radio stations send other information in place of their name (the title of the song for example). The system interprets this information as the name of the station.
Press and hold the "List" button at the steering mounted controls to update the list of stations received or press on the system update function: "Update list".
352
Audio and Telematics
Media
QUESTION
Playback of my USB memory stick starts only after a very long wait (around 2 to 3 minutes).
ANSWER
Some files supplied with the memory stick may greatly slow down access to reading the memory stick (multiplication by 10 of the catalogue time).
SOLUTION
Delete the files supplied with the memory stick and limit the number of sub-folders in the file structure on the memory stick.
When I connect my iPhone as a telephone and to the USB port at the same time, I am unable to play the music files.
When the iPhone connects automatically as a telephone, it forces the streaming function. The streaming function takes the place of the USB function which is then not useable, there is a period without sound of the track being played with Apple® players.
Disconnect and reconnect to the USB port (the USB function takes priority over streaming).
The CD is ejected automatically or is not played by the player.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play. right way up.
Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot be The CD has been recorded in a format that is not compatible with the player (udf...). played if it is too badly damaged.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is not recognised by the audio system.
Check the content in the case of a recorded CD: refer to the advice in the "AUDIO" section. The audio system's CD player does not play
DVDs.
Some recorded CDs will not be played by the
audio system because they are not of adequate
quality.
There is a long waiting
When a new medium is inserted, the system reads a certain
period following the insertion amount of data (directory, title, artist, etc.). This may take from a few
of a CD or connection of a seconds to a few minutes.
USB memory stick.
This phenomenon is normal.
.
353
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
The CD player sound is poor.
ANSWER The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.
SOLUTION
Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting an ambience.
Some characters in the media information are not displayed correctly while playing.
The audio system does not display some types of characters.
Use standard characters to name tracks and folders.
Playing of streaming files The peripheral device connected does not support automatic play. Start the playback from the device. does not start.
The names of tracks and the track length are not displayed on the screen when streaming audio.
The Bluetooth profile does not allow the transfer of this information.
354
Audio and Telematics
Settings
QUESTION In changing the setting of treble and bass the equalizer setting is deselected.
ANSWER
The selection of an equalizer setting imposes the balance settings. Modifying one without the other is not possible.
SOLUTION
Modify the balance or equalizer settings to obtain the desired musical ambience.
In changing the equalizer setting, treble and bass return to zero.
When changing the balance settings, the distribution setting is deselected.
When changing an distribution setting, the balance setting is deselected.
The selection of a distribution setting imposes the balance settings. Modify the balance or distribution settings to
Modifying one without the other is not possible.
obtain the desired musical ambience.
.
355
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources.
ANSWER
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings for Loudness, Ambience, Treble, Bass, Volume can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source.
SOLUTION
Check that the audio settings (Loudness, Ambience, Treble, Bass, Volume) are adapted to the sources listened to. Adjust Balance, Treble and Bass to the middle position, select the "None" musical ambience and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
With the engine off, the system switches off after a few minutes of use.
When the engine is switched off, the system's operating time
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery
depends on the state of charge of the battery.
charge.
The switch-off is normal: the system switches to economy mode and
switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
356
Audio and Telematics
Telephone
QUESTION I cannot connect my Bluetooth telephone.
ANSWER The telephone's Bluetooth function may be switched off or the telephone may not be visible.
The Bluetooth telephone is not compatible with the system.
SOLUTION Check that your telephone's Bluetooth function is switched on. Check in the telephone settings that it is "visible to all".
You can check the compatibility of your telephone at www.peugeot.co.uk (services).
The volume of the telephone connected in Bluetooth mode is inaudible.
Some contacts are duplicated in the list.
The volume depends both on the system and on the telephone.
Increase the volume of the audio system, to maximum if required, and increase the volume of the telephone if necessary.
The ambient noise level has an influence on the quality of telephone Reduce the ambient noise level (close the
communication.
windows, reduce the booster fan speed, slow
down...).
The options for synchronizing contacts are synchronizing the contacts on the SIM card, the contacts on the telephone, or both. When both synchronizations are selected, some contacts may be duplicated.
Select "Display SIM card contacts" or "Display telephone contacts".
Contacts are not shown in Some telephones offer display options. Depending on the settings
alphabetical order.
chosen, contacts can be transferred in a specific order.
Modify the display setting in the telephone directory.
The system does not receive The Bluetooth mode does not permit sending SMS text messages to
SMS text messages.
the system.
.
357
Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5)
Audio system / Bluetooth®
Audio and Telematics
Contents
First steps
360
Steering mounted controls
361
Menus
362
Radio
362
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio 364
Media
366
Telephone
370
Screen menu map(s)
372
Frequently asked questions
375
Your PEUGEOT Connect Sound (RD5) is coded in such a way that it will only operate in your vehicle.
As a safety measure, the driver must only carry out operations which require prolonged attention while the vehicle is stationary. When the engine is switched off and to prevent discharging of the battery, the audio equipment may switch off after a few minutes.
.
359
Audio and Telematics
First steps
On/off, volume setting.
Display the list of local stations. Long press: CD tracks or MP3 folders (CD / USB).
TA (Traffic Announcements) on/off.
Audio settings: front/rear fader, left/ right balance, bass/treble, loudness, audio ambiences.
Select the screen display mode: date, audio functions, telephone, Bluetooth, personalisationconfiguration.
Display main menu.
Automatic frequency search down/up. Select previous/next CD, MP3 or USB track.
Select next frequency down/up. Select previous/next MP3 folder. Select previous/next folder / genre / artist / playlist (USB).
Select wavebands FM, DAB and AM.
Select source: Radio; audio CD / MP3 CD; USB; Jack connection; Streaming; AUX.
360
Buttons 1 to 6: Select a pre-set radio station. Long press: pre-set a station.
Confirm. Abandon the current operation.
Steering mounted controls
Radio: select the previous/next pre-set station. USB: select genre / artist / folder from the classification list. Select the previous/next item in a menu.
Radio: automatic search for a higher frequency. CD / MP3 / USB: select the next track. CD / USB: continuous press: fast forward. Move in the list.
Change audio source. Confirm a selection. Call/end call on the telephone. Press for more than 2 seconds: telephone main menu.
Audio and Telematics
Radio: automatic search for a lower frequency. CD / MP3 / USB: select the previous track. CD / USB: continuous press: rewind. Move in the list.
Volume increase.
Volume decrease.
Mute: press the volume increase and decrease buttons simultaneously. The sound is restored by pressing one of the two volume buttons.
.
361
Audio and Telematics
Menus
Screen C
Screen A
Radio
Selecting a station
Press the SRC button repeatedly and select the radio.
Multimedia Media parameters, Radio parameters.
Telephone Call, Directory management, Telephone management, Hang up.
Bluetooth connection Connections management, Search for a device.
Personalisation-configuration Define the vehicle parameters, Choice of language, Display configuration, Choice of units, Date and time adjustment.
For a detailed global view of the menus available, refer to "Screen menu map" section.
Press the BAND button to select a waveband.
Briefly press one of the buttons to carry out an automatic search of the radio stations.
Press one of the buttons to carry out a manual search up / down for radio frequencies.
Press the LIST button to display the list of stations received locally (30 stations maximum). To update this list, press for more than two seconds.
362
Audio and Telematics
RDS
The external environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, basement car parks, ...) may block reception, including in RDS mode. This is a normal effect of the way in which radio waves are transmitted and does not indicate any failure of the audio system.
Press the MENU button.
Select "Activate RDS".
Press OK, RDS is displayed in the screen.
In "Radio" mode, press OK directly to activate / deactivate RDS mode.
Receiving TA messages
The TA (Traffic Announcement) function gives priority to TA alert messages. To operate, this function needs good reception of a radio station transmitting this type of message. When a traffic report is transmitted, the current audio source (Radio, CD, ...) is interrupted automatically to play the TA message. Normal playback of the audio source resumes at the end of the transmission of the message.
Select "Audio functions".
Press OK.
Select the "FM waveband preferences" function.
RDS, if displayed, enables you to continue listening to the same station by automatic retuning to alternative frequencies. However, in certain conditions, coverage of an RDS station may not be assured throughout the country as radio stations do not cover 100 % of the territory. This explains the loss of reception of a station that can occur during a journey.
Press the TA button to activate or deactivate traffic messages.
Press OK.
.
363
Audio and Telematics
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) radio
Display options: if active but not available, the display will be struck out.
If the "DAB" station being listened to is not available on "FM", "DAB FM" is struck out.
Represents the signal strength for the band being listened to.
Display of RadioText (TXT) for the current radio station.
Display the name of the current station.
Preset stations, buttons 1 to 6. Short press: select the preset radio station. Long press: preset a radio station.
Display the name of the multiplex service being used.
364
Audio and Telematics
Digital radio
Digital radio provides a superior audio quality and also additional categories of traffic announcements (TA INFO). The different "multiplex services" offer a choice of radio stations in alphabetical order.
When the radio station is displayed in the screen, press on "OK" to display the contextual menu. (Frequency hopping (RDS), DAB / FM auto tracking, RadioText (TXT) display, Information on the station, ...)
Change band (FM1, FM2, DAB, ...)
DAB / FM tracking
Change of station within the same "multiplex service".
Start a search for the next "multiplex service".
Long press: select the desired categories of announcements from Transport, News, Entertainment and Flash special (availability according to the station).
"DAB" does not have 100% coverage of the country. When the digital signal is weak, "DAB / FM auto tracking" allows you to continue listening to the same station, by automatically switching to the corresponding analogue "FM" station (if it exists).
Press the "Menu" button.
Select "Multimedia" and confirm.
Select "DAB / FM auto tracking" and confirm
If "DAB / FM auto tracking" is on, there will be a difference of a few seconds in the programme when the system changes to analogue "FM" radio, with sometimes a variation in volume. When the strength of the digital signal is good again, the system automatically switches back to "DAB"
If the "DAB" station you are listening to is not available on "FM" ("DAB/FM" option barred), or if "DAB / FM auto tracking" is not on, the sound will be cut when the digital signal is too weak.
.
365
Audio and Telematics
Media
USB player
Insert a USB memory stick into the USB port or connect a USB peripheral device to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied).
To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.
The system builds playlists (temporary memory), which can take from a few seconds to several minutes on the first connection. Reducing the number of non-music files and the number of folders reduces this waiting time. Playlists are updated every time the ignition is switched off or a USB memory stick is connected. The lists are memorised: if the lists are not changed, the subsequent loading time is reduced.
366
Press and hold LIST to display the different classifications.
Select by "Folder" / "Artist" / "Genre" / "Playlist".
Press OK to select the classification required, then press OK again to confirm.
Press LIST briefly to display the previously selected classification.
Navigate through the list using the left/right and up/down buttons.
Confirm the selection by pressing OK.
Press one of these buttons to gain access to the previous / next track in the list. Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or rewind.
Press one of these buttons to gain access to the previous / next "Folder" / "Artist" / "Genre" / "Playlist" in the list.
Auxiliary socket (AUX)
CD player
Insert circular compact discs only. Some anti-pirating systems, on original discs or CDs copied using a personal recorder, may cause faults which are no reflection on the quality of the vehicle's player. Insert a CD in the player, play begins automatically.
Connect the portable device (MP3 player, ...) to the auxiliary Jack socket using an audio cable (not supplied).
Press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select AUX.
First adjust the volume on your portable device (to a high level). Then adjust the volume on your audio system. Operation of controls is via the portable device.
Do not connect a device to both the Jack auxiliary socket and the USB port at the same time.
Audio and Telematics
To play a disc which has already been inserted, press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select CD. Press one of the buttons to select a track on the CD. Press the LIST REFRESH button to display the list of tracks on the CD.
Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or rewind.
.
367
Audio and Telematics
Playing an MP3 CD compilation
Insert an MP3 compilation in the CD player. The audio equipment searches for all of the music tracks, which may take anything between a few seconds and several tens of seconds, before play begins.
On a single disc, the CD player can read up to 255 MP3 files spread over 8 folder levels. However, it is advisable to keep to a limit of two levels to reduce the access time before the CD is played. While the CD is being played, the folder structure is not followed. All of the files are displayed on a single level.
Information and advice
To play a disc which has already been inserted, press the SOURCE button several times in succession and select "CD".
The audio system will only play files with the extension ".mp3" with a sampling rate of 22.05 KHz or 44.1 KHz. No other type of file (.wma, .mp4, .m3u, etc.) can be played.
Press one of the buttons to select a folder on the CD.
Press one of the buttons to select a track on the CD.
Press the LIST button to display the list of directories of the MP3 compilation.
Press and hold one of the buttons for fast forward or backward play.
It is advisable to restrict file names to 20 characters without using special characters (e.g. " ? ; ù) to avoid any playing or displaying problems.
In order to be able to play a recorded CDR or CDRW, when recording, the ISO 9660 level 1.2 or Joliet file format is recommended. If the disc is recorded in another format, it may not be played correctly. It is recommended that the same recording format is always used for an individual disc, with as low a speed as possible (4x maximum) for optimum sound quality. In the particular case of a multi-session CD, the Joliet format is recommended.
368
Audio and Telematics
Bluetooth® audio streaming Connecting Apple® players
Use only USB memory sticks formatted FAT32 (File Allocation Table).
To protect the system, do not use a USB hub.
It is recommended that you use genuine Apple® USB cables for correct operation.
Streaming allows music files on the telephone to be played via the audio system.
Connect the telephone: see the "Telephone" section.
Select in the "Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio" menu the telephone to be connected. The audio system connects to a newly paired telephone automatically.
Activate the streaming source by pressing the SOURCE* button.
Connect the Apple® player to the USB port using a suitable cable (not supplied). Play starts automatically.
Control is via the audio system.
The classifications available are those of the portable device connected (artists / albums / genres / playlists / audiobooks / podcasts).
The version of software in the audio system may not be compatible with the generation of your Apple® player.
Control of tracks to be played is via the buttons on the audio system control panel and the steering mounted controls**. The contextual information can be displayed in the screen.
* In certain cases, play of the audio files must be initiated from the keypad.
** If the telephone supports the function.
.
369
Audio and Telematics
Telephone
Pairing a Bluetooth® telephone
Screen C (Available according to model and version)
As a safety measure and because they require prolonged attention on the part of the driver, the operations for pairing of the Bluetooth mobile telephone with the Bluetooth hands-free system of your audio equipment must be carried out with the vehicle stationary and the ignition on.
In the menu, select: - "Bluetooth: Telephone - Audio" - "Bluetooth configuration" - "Perform a Bluetooth search"
A window is displayed with a message that a search is in progress.
Go to www.peugeot.co.uk for more information (compatibility, more help, ...).
Activate the telephone's Bluetooth function and ensure that it is "visible to all" (telephone configuration).
The services available depend on the network, the SIM card and the compatibility of the Bluetooth device used. Consult your telephone's manual and your operator to find out which services are available to you.
Select the telephone to be connected from the list. Only one telephone can be connected at a time.
A virtual keypad is displayed in the screen: enter a code with at least 4 digits.
Confirm by pressing OK.
A message in the screen indicates the telephone chosen. To accept the pairing, enter the same code on the telephone, then confirm with OK. If pairing fails, the number of attempts is not limited.
Press the MENU button.
The first 4 telephones recognised are displayed in this window.
The "Telephone" menu permits access to the following functions in particular: "Directory"*, "Calls list", "Consult the paired equipment".
A message that the pairing has been successful appears in the screen.
The automatic connection authorised is only active after the telephone has been configured. The directory and the call list can be accessed after the necessary synchronisation period.
* If your telephone is fully compatible. 370
Audio and Telematics
Receiving a call
An incoming call is announced by a ring and a superimposed display in the screen.
Select the YES tab on the display using the buttons.
Confirm by pressing OK.
Press this button at the steering mounted controls to accept the call.
Making a call
From the "Bluetooth : Telephone - Audio" menu.
Select "Manage the telephone call".
Select "Call". Or Select "Calls list". Or Select "Directory".
Press this button for more than two seconds for access to your directory, then navigate using the thumbwheel.
Ending a call
During a call, press this button for more than 2 seconds.
Confirm with OK to end the call.
The system accesses the telephone's contacts directory, depending on its compatibility, and while it is connected by Bluetooth.
Or
To dial a number, use your telephone's keypad, with the vehicle stationary.
With certain telephones connected by Bluetooth you can send a contact to the directory of the audio system. Contacts imported in this way are saved in a permanent directory visible to all, whatever the telephone connected. The menu for the directory is not accessible if it is empty.
.
371
Audio and Telematics
Screen menu map(s)
Screen A
Radio-CD
1
Units
1
RDS options
2
REG mode
2
CD repeat
2
Shuffle play
2
Temperature: °Celsius / °Fahrenheit
2
Fuel consumption: KM/L - L/100 - MPG
2
Vehicle config*
1
R wiper in rev
2
Guide lighting
2
Options
1
Diagnostic
2
View
3
Abandon
3
372
Display adjust
1
Year
2
Month
2
Day
2
Hour
2
Minutes
2
12 H/24 H mode
2
Language
1
Français
2
Italiano
2
Nederlands
2
Portuguès
2
Português do Brasil
2
Deutsch
2
English
2
Español
2
Cestina
2
Hrvatski
2
Magyar
2
* The settings vary according to the trim level of the vehicle.
Screen C
MEDIA Media parameters
1
Choice of playback mode
2
Normal
3
Random
3
Random all
3
Repeat
3
Choice of track listing
2
By folders
3
By artists
3
By genres
3
By playlists
3
Radio parameters
1
Audio and Telematics
TELEPHONE Call
1
Dial
2
Directory
2
Calls list
2
Voice mail box
2
Directory management
1
Consult an entry
2
Delete an entry
2
Delete all entries
2
Telephone management
1
Telephone status
2
Hang up
1
BLUETOOTH CONNECTION Connections management
1
Search for a device
1
.
373
Audio and Telematics
PERSONALISATION CONFIGURATION
Define the vehicle 1 parameters*
Choice of language
1
Display configuration
1
Choice of units
2
Date and time adjustment
2
Display parameters
2
Brightness
2
Choice of sounds
1
* Depending on vehicle equipment. 374
Audio and Telematics
Frequently asked questions
The table below gives answers to the most frequently asked questions on your audio system.
QUESTION
With the engine off, the audio system switches off after a few minutes of use.
ANSWER
When the engine is switched off, the audio system operating time depends on the state of charge of the battery. The switch-off is normal: the audio equipment switches to economy mode and switches off to prevent discharging of the vehicle's battery.
SOLUTION
Start the vehicle's engine to increase the battery charge.
The message "the audio system is overheated" appears on the display.
In order to protect the installation if the surrounding temperature is too high, the audio system switches to an automatic thermal protection mode leading to a reduction in volume or CD play stopping.
Switch the audio system off for a few minutes to allow the system to cool.
Radio
QUESTION
There is a difference in sound quality between the different audio sources (radio, CD...).
ANSWER
For optimum sound quality, the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) can be adapted to the different sound sources, which may result in audible differences when changing source (radio, CD...).
SOLUTION
Check that the audio settings (Volume, Bass, Treble, Ambience, Loudness) are adapted to the sources listened to. It is advisable to set the audio functions (Bass, Treble, Front-Rear Balance, LeftRight Balance) to the middle position, select the musical ambience "None" and set the loudness correction to the "Active" position in CD mode or to the "Inactive" position in radio mode.
.
375
Audio and Telematics
QUESTION
The stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
ANSWER An incorrect waveband is selected.
SOLUTION
Press the BAND AST button to return to the waveband (AM, FM1, FM2, FMAST) on which the stations are stored.
The traffic announcement (TA) is displayed. I do not receive any traffic information.
The radio station is not part of the regional traffic information network.
Tune to a radio station which broadcasts traffic information.
The quality of reception of the radio station listened to gradually deteriorates or the stored stations do not function (no sound, 87.5 Mhz is displayed...).
The vehicle is too far from the transmitter used by the station listened to or there is no transmitter in the geographical area through which the vehicle is travelling.
Activate the RDS function to enable the system to check whether there is a more powerful transmitter in the geographical area.
The environment (hills, buildings, tunnels, underground car parks...) This phenomenon is normal and does not indicate
block reception, including in RDS mode.
a failure of the audio equipment.
The aerial is absent or has been damaged (for example when going Have the aerial checked by a PEUGEOT dealer. through an automatic car wash or into an underground car park).
Sound cut-outs of 1 to
During this brief sound cut-out, the RDS searches for another
2 seconds in radio mode. frequency giving better reception of the station.
Deactivate the RDS function if the phenomenon is too frequent and always on the same route.
376
Audio and Telematics
Media
QUESTION
The message "USB peripheral error" is displayed on the screen. The Bluetooth connection is cut.
ANSWER The battery of the peripheral may not be sufficiently charged.
The USB memory stick is not recognised. The USB memory stick may be corrupt.
SOLUTION Recharge the battery of the peripheral device.
Reformat the USB memory stick.
The CD is ejected automatically or is not played by the player.
The CD is inserted upside down, is unplayable, does not contain any - Check that the CD is inserted in the player the
audio data or contains an audio format which the player cannot play.
right way up.
The CD is protected by an anti-pirating protection system which is - Check the condition of the CD: the CD cannot
not recognised by the audio equipment.
be played if it is too damaged.
- Check the content in the case of a recorded
CD: consult the advice in the "Audio" section.
-The audio equipment's CD player does not
play DVDs.
- Due to their quality level, certain writeable
CDs will not be played by the audio system.
The CD player sound is poor.
The CD used is scratched or of poor quality.
The audio equipment settings (bass, treble, ambiences) are unsuitable.
Insert good quality CDs and store them in suitable conditions.
Set the treble or bass level to 0, without selecting an ambience.
.
377
Audio and Telematics
Telephone
QUESTION
I am unable to access my voicemail.
ANSWER Few telephones or service providers allow the use of this function.
SOLUTION
378
Alphabetical index
A
ABS................................................................ 121 Accessories.................................. 152, 220, 222 AdBlue® additive........................ 26, 32, 233-237 Additive, Diesel..............................................230 Adjusting headlamps..................................... 113 Adjusting head restraints.................................77 Adjusting the seat...................................... 73, 74 Adjusting the air distribution............................95 Adjusting the air flow........................................95 Adjusting the date.......................................47-49 Adjusting the height and reach
of the steering wheel.....................................72 Adjusting the lumbar support...........................73 Adjusting the temperature...............................95 Adjusting the time.......................................47-49 Advice on driving................................... 146, 147 Affaire version................................................291 Airbags............................................. 23, 127, 134 Airbags, curtain......................................129, 130 Airbags, front......................................... 127, 130 Airbags, lateral.......................................129, 130 Air conditioning............................. 10, 93, 95, 98 Air conditioning, automatic........................92, 95 Air conditioning, digital..................................100 Air conditioning, manual.................... 92-94, 100 Air intake..........................................................99 Air vents...........................................................91 Alarm................................................................67 Anti-lock braking system (ABS)..................... 121 Anti-pinch.................................................70, 102 Anti-slip regulation (ASR).............................. 121 Anti-theft..................................................53, 154 Armrest.............................................................82 Armrest, front...................................................84 Armrest, rear....................................................86 Assistance call............................................... 119 Audible warning............................................. 121 Audio streaming (Bluetooth).......... 312, 314, 369 Auxiliary......................................................... 312
B
Back-up key.....................................................63 Battery.....................................219, 231, 268-271 Battery, charging............................................270 Battery, remote control................. 54, 55, 64, 65 Bicycle carrier................................................222 Blanking screen (snow shield)............... 217, 218 Blind, panoramic roof.....................................102 Blind spot sensors...................................16, 195 BlueHDi......................................28, 32, 233, 274 Bluetooth (hands-free)...................346, 347, 370 Bluetooth (telephone)............................ 346, 347 Bonnet............................................................225 Boot.................................................................. 61 Boot lamp.........................................................88 Brake discs.....................................................232 Brake lamps........................................... 257, 259 Brakes................................................21, 25, 232 Bulbs (changing)............................252, 257, 259
C
Cable, audio................................................... 312 Cable, jack..................................................... 312 Capacity, fuel tank......................................... 213 Cap, fuel filler................................................. 213 CD, MP3......................................... 312, 367, 368 Central locking...............................51, 56, 58, 59 Changing a bulb.............................252, 257, 259 Changing a fuse............................ 262, 264, 266 Changing a wheel..................................246, 247 Changing a wiper blade......................... 117, 222 Changing the remote control battery.........54, 64 Checking the engine oil level...........................31 Checking the levels................................ 228-230
Checking tyre pressures (using the kit)...............................................239
Checks...................................226, 227, 231, 232 Child lock..................................................63, 144 Children..........................................138, 142, 143 Children (safety).............................................144 Child seats ............. 126, 131-133, 137, 138, 145 Child seats, conventional............................... 137 Child seats, ISOFIX.......................140, 142, 143 Closing the boot...............................................61 Closing the doors...........................51, 56, 58, 59 Collision risk alert..........................................190 Compressor, tyre inflation.............................239 Configuration, vehicle......................................44 Connection, Bluetooth.......................... 346, 347 Control, electric windows.................................70 Control, emergency boot release....................62 Control, emergency door.................................63 Control, heated seats.......................................76 Control stalk, lighting............................... 14, 107 Control stalk, wipers............................... 114-116 Courtesy lamps..............................................103 Cruise control......................... 173, 177, 180, 181 Cruise control, dynamic.................................180 Cup holder........................................................82
D
DAB (Digital Audio Broadcasting) Digital radio.......................... 310, 311, 364, 365
Date (setting)...............................................47-49 Daytime running
lamps.................. 108, 110, 252, 253, 255, 256 Deactivating the passenger
airbag................................................... 127, 134
.
379
Alphabetical index
G
Deactivation of DSC (ESC)............................123 Deadlocking...............................................52, 60 Defrosting.........................................93, 100, 101 Demisting.................................................93, 100 Demisting, rear screen.......................... 101, 105 Denon (audio system)..............................89, 293 Dimensions....................................................289 Dipstick.....................................................31, 228 Direction indicators........ 112, 252, 255, 257, 259 Display of inter-vehicle time...........................187 Display screen, instrument panel..................164 Display screen, multifunction
(with audio system)........................................49 Display screen, multifunction
(without audio system)...................................49 Driver Sport Pack...........................................169 Driving abroad...............................................107 Driving economically.......................................10 Driving positions (storing)................................75 Dynamic pack (sport).....................................169 Dynamic stability
control (DSC)............................17, 21, 121, 123
E
EBFD.............................................................. 121 Eco-driving (advice).........................................10 Economy mode..............................................219 Electronic brake force distribution (EBFD).... 121 Electronic stability control (ESC)............. 17, 121 Emergency braking assistance (EBA)........... 121 Emergency call.............................................. 119 Emergency collision braking............22, 190, 193 Emergency switching off................................152
Emergency warning lamps.................... 118, 238 Emissions control system, SCR......................27 Energy economy mode..................................219 Engine compartment............................ 226, 227 Engine, Diesel.......... 15, 215, 227, 274, 281, 285 Engine, petrol.................................215, 226, 275 Engines..........................................275, 281, 285 Environment.........................................10, 55, 64
F
Filling the AdBlue® tank.................................237 Filling the fuel tank................................. 213, 215 Filter, air.........................................................231 Filter, oil..........................................................231 Filter, particle.........................................230, 231 Filter, passenger compartment......................231 Fitting a wheel................................................248 Fitting roof bars..............................................223 Fittings, boot.............................................. 87, 88 Fittings, interior................................................82 Flap, fuel filler................................................. 213 Flashing indicators......................................... 112 Foglamps, rear...............................109, 257, 259 Foglamps.......................................................252 Foglamps, front..............................109, 252, 256 Folding the rear seats......................................80 Frequency (radio).................................. 308, 309 Fuel.......................................................... 10, 215 Fuel consumption.............................................10 Fuel tank..........................................................22 Fusebox, engine compartment......................266 Fuses............................................. 262, 264, 266
Gauge, fuel.................................................... 213 Gearbox, automatic.....10, 12, 15, 151, 153, 162,
165, 169-171, 177, 181, 232, 268 Gearbox, electronic.........................................10 Gearbox, manual................ 10, 12, 15, 162, 163,
170, 171, 177, 181, 232 Gear lever........................................................10 Gear lever, automatic gearbox......................165 Gear lever, manual gearbox..........................163 Gear shift indicator........................................164 Glove box, refrigerated....................................82 Guide-me-home............................................. 112
H
Hazard warning lamps........................... 118, 238 Headlamp adjustment.................................... 113 Headlamps, automatic
illumination....................................108, 111, 112 Headlamps, dipped beam.............. 107, 252, 254 Headlamps, halogen..............................252, 254 Headlamps, main beam.........107, 252, 254, 256 Headlamp wash............................................. 115 Head restraints, front.......................................77 Head restraints, rear..................................80, 81 Heating...........................................10, 91, 93, 94 Hill start assist................................................162 Horn............................................................... 121
380
Alphabetical index
I
Identification, vehicle.....................................292 Ignition..............................................98, 150, 152 Immobiliser, electronic...................... 53, 65, 154 Indicator, AdBlue® range..................................32 Indicator, coolant temperature.........................28 Indicator, engine oil level.................................31 Indicator lamps, operation............. 14, 15, 17, 20 Indicator lamps, status...............................15, 20 Indicators, direction....................................... 112 Inflating tyres...................................................10 Inflating tyres and accessories
(using the kit)...............................................239 Instrument panel..............................................12 Intelligent Traction Control.............................122 Interactive help.........................................44, 337 Inter-vehicle time............................................187 Isofix mountings......................................140-144
J
Jack..................................................85, 246, 312
K
Key........................ 50, 51, 56, 58, 59, 63, 64, 65 Keyless Entry
and Starting....................... 58-60, 65, 151, 154 Key with remote control...............51, 53, 59, 154 Kit, hands-free...............................346, 347, 370 Kit, temporary puncture repair................. 87, 239
L
Labels, identification......................................292 Level, brake fluid............................................229 Level, Diesel additive.............................230, 231 Level, engine coolant...............................28, 230 Level, engine oil.......................................31, 228 Level, headlamp wash...........................116, 230 Levels and checks................................. 226-230 Level, screenwash fluid.........................116, 230 Light-emitting diodes - LEDs.........252, 257, 259 Lighting.............................................14, 104, 107 Lighting dimmer...............................................36 Lighting, guide-me home..................53, 111, 112 Lighting, interior.....................................103, 104 Lighting, mood...............................................104 Lighting, welcome.......................................... 112 Loading....................................................10, 223 Load reduction mode.....................................219 Locating your vehicle.................................53, 57
Locking.............................................................65 Long objects, transporting...............................86 Low fuel level...........................................22, 213 Luggage cover...........................................88, 89 Luggage retaining strap............................. 87, 88 Lumbar.......................................................73, 78
M
Maintenance, routine.......................................10 Map reading lamps........................................103 Markings, identification..................................292 Massage function ............................................78 Mat...................................................................83 Memorising a speed...................................... 173 Menu.................................... 302, 304, 306, 316,
318, 322, 330, 342, 344 Menu, main....................................................362 Menus (audio).............................. 302, 304, 306,
316, 318, 342, 344 Menus (Touch screen).................. 295, 300, 301 Mirror, rear view.............................................106 Mirrors, door..................................101, 105, 195 Misfuel prevention.......................................... 214 Mountings, Isofix.................................... 140, 141 MP3 CD..........................................................368
.
381
Alphabetical index
N
Navigation......................................................322 Net, high load retaining....................................90 Number plate lamps.......................................261
O
Oil change......................................................228 Oil consumption.............................................228 OIl, engine......................................................228 Opening the bonnet.......................................225 Opening the boot.......................... 50, 56, 58, 61 Opening the doors.............................. 50, 56, 58
Parking brake, electric.....................20, 155, 160 Parking sensors, front....................................198 Parking sensors, rear....................................198 PEUGEOT Connect Apps..............................341 Peugeot Connect Assistance.................... 119 Peugeot Connect Packs............................ 119 Peugeot Connect SOS.............................. 119 Peugeot Connect Sound (RD5).................359 Plates, identification......................................292 Player, Apple®........................................314, 369 Player, MP3 CD.............................. 312, 367, 368 Player, USB............................................312, 366 Port, USB...................................82, 85, 312, 366 Pressures, tyres.....................239, 245, 251, 292 Pre-tensioning seat belts...............................126 Priming pump................................................. 274 Priming the fuel system................................. 274 Protecting children..................127, 131-133, 138,
140, 142, 143, 145 Puncture.........................................................239
Recirculation, air........................................95, 99 Reduction of electrical load...........................219 Regeneration of the particle filter..................231 Reinitialisation of the under-inflation
detection system..........................................210 Reinitialising the remote control................54, 64 Reminder, key in ignition................................150 Remote control...................50, 51, 56, 58-60, 65 Removing a wheel.........................................248 Removing the mat............................................83 Replacing bulbs.............................252, 257, 259 Replacing fuses.................................... 262, 264 Replacing the air filter....................................231 Replacing the oil filter....................................231 Replacing the passenger
compartment filter.......................................231 Reservoir, headlamp wash............................230 Reservoir, screenwash..................................230 Resetting the service indicator........................30 Resetting the trip recorder...............................35 Reversing camera..........................................200 Reversing lamp...................................... 257, 259 Risk areas (update)........................................327 Roof bars........................................................223 Running out of fuel (Diesel)........................... 274
P
Pads, brake....................................................232 Paint colour code...........................................292 Panoramic glass sunroof...............................102 Parcel shelf, rear..............................................87 Park Assist.....................................201, 203, 206 Parking brake...................................15, 154, 232
R
Radio..................................... 308, 309, 312, 362 Radio, digital (Digital Audio
Broadcasting - DAB)............................ 310, 311 Range, AdBlue®...............................................32 RDS................................................................309 Rear screen, demisting..................................101 Recharging the battery..................................270
S
Safety, children...............................127, 131-133, 138, 142, 143, 145
Saturation of the particle filter (Diesel)..........231
382
Alphabetical index
Screen, cold climate...................................... 217 Screen, colour....................................... 300, 301 Screen, instrument panel.................................37 Screen menu map.........302, 304, 306, 316, 318,
322, 330, 342, 344, 372-374 Screen, monochrome....................................372 Screen, monochrome A.................................372 Screen, multifunction
(with audio system)................................49, 362 Screen, multifunction
(without audio system)...................................49 Screenwash................................................... 115 SCR (Selective Catalytic Reduction).............233 Seat belts........................................124-126, 137 Seat, rear bench........................................79, 80 Seats, electric.................................................. 74 Seats, front................................................. 73-75 Seats, heated...................................................76 Serial number, vehicle...................................292 Service indicator..............................................28 Service (warning lamp)....................................19 Settings, equipment.........................................44 Settings (Menus)............................................330 Settings, system.............................................338 Sidelamps...............107, 252, 253, 255-257, 259 Side repeater.................................................256 Ski flap.............................................................86 Snow chains...........................................209, 216 Socket, 12 V accessory...................... 82, 84, 88 Socket, 230 V.............................................82, 85 Socket, auxiliary.....................................312, 367 Socket, JACK.............................82, 85, 312, 367 Sockets, audio.................................................85 Speed limiter.......................................... 173, 174 Spotlamps, side..................................... 113, 256 Stability control (ESC)............................. 17, 121 Starting the vehicle........................ 148, 151, 152 Starting using another battery.......................152 Station, radio................................. 308, 309, 362
Stay, bonnet...................................................225 Steering mounted controls, audio.........299, 361 Steering wheel, adjustment.............................72 Stop.................................................................. 18 Stopping the vehicle...................... 151, 152, 165 Stop & Start...................16, 25, 39, 92, 100, 170,
172, 213, 225, 231, 268, 271 Stop (warning lamp).........................................18 Storage...........................................82, 84, 86-88 Storage wells............................................. 87, 88 Storing driving positions..................................75 Stowing rings............................................. 87, 88 Switching off the engine................................148 Synchronising the remote
control......................................................54, 64
T
Tables of weights...................................278, 285 Tables of engines...........................275, 281, 285 Tables of fuses.............................. 262, 264, 266 Tank, fuel........................................................ 213 Technical data........................275, 278, 281, 285 Telephone......................................346-348, 370 Temperature, coolant.......................................28 Three flashes (direction indicators)............... 112 Time (setting)..............................................47-49 TMC (Traffic info)...........................................328 Tools.......................................................239, 246 Topping-up the AdBlue® additive..................235 Top Tether......................................................140 Total distance recorder....................................35 Touch screen..... 38, 40, 42, 44, 45, 47, 173, 211
Touch screen (Menus).................. 295, 300, 301 Towbar.................................................... 147, 218 Towed loads...........................................278, 285 Towing another vehicle..................................272 Towing eye.......................................................87 Traction control (ASR)........................17, 21, 121 Traffic information (TA)..........................329, 363 Traffic information (TMC)...............................328 Trailer..................................................... 147, 218 Triangle, warning...........................................238 Trip computer..............................................37-39 Trip distance recorder......................................35 Tyres................................................................. 10 Tyre under-inflation
detection................................ 24, 209, 211, 245
U
Under-inflation (detection).............................209 Unlocking............................................ 50, 56, 58 Updating risk areas........................................327 Updating the date.............................................47 Updating the time.............................................47 USB..................................................85, 312, 368
V
Ventilation...................................... 10, 91-94, 99
.
383
Alphabetical index
W
Warning and indicator lamps............... 13, 17, 18 Warning lamp, braking system........................21 Warning lamp, Diesel engine
pre-heater...................................................... 15 Warning lamps.....................................15, 18, 20 Warning lamp, SCR emissions
control system...............................................27 Warning lamp, Service....................................19 Warning lamp, Stop.........................................18 Washer jets, heated....................................... 117 Weights..................................................278, 285 Wheel, spare.................................... 87, 246, 247 Window controls..............................................70 Windscreen, heated....................................... 117 Wiper blades (changing)........................ 117, 222 Wiper, rear..................................................... 115 Wipers.............................................. 16, 114, 116 Wipers, automatic rain sensitive............ 114, 116
384
Labels are applied at various points on your vehicle. They carry safety warnings as well as vehicle identification information. Do not remove them: they form an integral part of your vehicle.
Reproduction or translation of all or part of this document is prohibited without written authorisation from Automobiles PEUGEOT.
Automobiles PEUGEOT declares, by application of the provisions of the European legislation (Directive 2000/53) relating to End of Life Vehicles, that it achieves the objectives set by this legislation and that recycled materials are used in the manufacture of the products that it sells.
For any work on your vehicle, use a qualified workshop that has the technical information, competence and equipment required, which a PEUGEOT dealer is able to provide.
We draw your attention to the following points:
- The fitting of electrical equipment or accessories not listed by PEUGEOT may cause faults and failures with the electrical system of your vehicle. Contact a PEUGEOT dealer for information on the range of recommended accessories.
- As a safety measure, access to the diagnostic socket, used for the vehicle's electronic systems, is reserved strictly for PEUGEOT dealers or qualified workshops, equipped with the special tools required (risk of malfunctions of the vehicle's electronic systems that could cause breakdowns or serious accidents). The manufacturer cannot be held responsible if this advice is not followed.
- Any modification or adaptation not intended or authorised by Automobiles PEUGEOT or carried out without meeting the technical requirements defined by the manufacturer would lead to the suspension of the legal and contractual warranties.
Printed in the EU Anglais
04-16
www.peugeot .com
*16308.0040* Anglais 16308.0040